Lexus IS F Owner's manual

Lexus IS F Owner's manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
Before driving
Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.
2
When driving
Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3
Interior features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior
features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire,
or is involved in an accident.
6
Vehicle
specifications
Detailed vehicle information.
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects for US owners and seat belt instructions for Canadian owners
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
Index
Before driving
1-1. Key information
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap........... 68
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system........... 71
Alarm.................................................... 73
Theft prevention labels
(U.S.A.)............................................. 75
Keys ...................................................... 20
1-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors and trunk
Smart access system with
push-button start .......................... 24
Wireless remote control .............. 35
Doors.................................................... 37
Trunk...................................................... 41
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ............... 76
SRS airbags ....................................... 78
Front passenger occupant
classification system.................... 89
Child restraint systems ................. 94
Installing child restraints............... 98
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats.......................................... 44
Driving position memory
(driver’s seat) ................................. 45
Seat position memory
(front passenger’s seat) ............. 49
Head restraints.................................. 51
Seat belts ............................................ 52
Steering wheel................................. 58
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror ................................................ 60
Outside rear view mirrors............ 61
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows................................ 63
Moon roof .......................................... 65
2
2
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle........................ 108
Engine (ignition) switch ................ 116
Automatic transmission.............. 120
Turn signal lever............................. 128
Parking brake ................................. 129
Horn.................................................... 130
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ....................... 131
Indicators and warning
lights................................................. 135
Multi-information display........... 138
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch............................ 142
Fog light switch .............................. 145
Windshield wipers and
washer............................................. 146
Headlight cleaner switch ........... 149
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control ................................ 150
Dynamic radar cruise
control............................................. 153
Intuitive parking assist ................. 163
Driving assist systems.................. 169
PCS (Pre-Collision System)..... 176
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage...................... 180
Vehicle load limits......................... 183
Winter driving tips ........................ 184
Trailer towing.................................. 186
Dinghy towing ................................ 187
3
Interior features
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
1
Automatic air conditioning
system ............................................. 190
Rear window and outside rear
2
view mirror defoggers ............. 198
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types ...................... 199 3
Using the radio.............................. 202
Using the CD player................... 209
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs................................... 215 4
Optimal use of the audio
system ............................................. 221
Using the AUX adapter............ 224
5
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ............................ 225
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list............................ 227 6
• Interior lights ............................... 229
• Personal lights ............................ 229
7
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index
3-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features................ 231
• Glove box...................................... 231
• Console box................................ 232
• Overhead console.................... 233
• Cup holders................................. 234
• Bottle holders/
door pockets............................... 236
4
Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle exterior .......................... 268
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle interior.............................. 271
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors......................................... 237
Vanity mirror................................. 238
Clock................................................. 239
Satellite switches .......................... 240
Ashtrays ........................................... 243
Cigarette lighter ........................... 244
Power outlet................................... 245
Seat heaters.................................... 246
Armrest ........................................... 248
Trunk storage extension............ 249
Coat hooks ...................................... 251
Floor mat.......................................... 252
Trunk features................................ 253
Garage door opener.................. 256
Compass.......................................... 262
4
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements ..... 274
General maintenance................ 276
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs ...................................... 279
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions................................. 280
Hood................................................. 283
Positioning a floor jack............... 284
Engine compartment.................. 286
Tires .................................................. 300
Tire inflation pressure.................... 311
Wheels............................................... 315
Air conditioning filter................... 317
Electronic key battery ............... 320
Checking and replacing
fuses................................................ 322
Headlight aim................................. 336
Light bulbs...................................... 338
5
When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers..................... 344
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ....................................... 345
If you think something
is wrong.......................................... 351
Fuel pump shut off system ........ 352
Event data recorder................... 353
6
Vehicle specifications
6-1. Specifications
1
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)..................... 402
Fuel information............................. 413
Tire information ............................. 416 2
6-2. Customization
Customizable features .............. 428
3
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds... ..... 355
If a warning message is
displayed....................................... 365
If you have a flat tire..................... 379
If the engine will not start ......... 388
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P............................. 389
If you lose your keys................... 390
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ........................ 391
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ................................... 394
If your vehicle overheats ........... 397
If the vehicle becomes
stuck............................................... 400
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ........................... 433
7
4
For owners
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners.................................. 436 5
Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners
(in French).................................... 437
6
Index
Abbreviation list ...................................440 7
Alphabetical index............................... 442
What to do if... .......................................453
5
Pictorial index
Exterior
Windshield wipers P. 146
Parking lights P. 142
Moon roof  P. 65
Outside rear view
mirrors P. 61
Hood P. 283
Side marker lights P. 142
Headlights (low/high beam)
P. 142
Front fog lights P. 145
Front turn signal lights P. 128
Headlights (high beam) P. 142
6
Rear window defogger P. 198
Side marker lights P. 142
Tail lights P. 142
Doors P. 37
Tires
P. 379
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure P. 411
P. 416
●Information
Trunk
P. 41
Rear turn signal lights
P. 128
Fuel filler door P. 68
: If equipped
7
Pictorial index
Seat belts P. 52
Head restraints
P. 51
Power window
switches P. 63
Interior
AUX adapter P. 224
Bottle holders/door pockets P. 236
Floor mats P. 252
SRS driver airbag P. 78
SRS knee airbags
A
P. 78
SRS front passenger
airbag P. 78
Armrest P. 248
Front seats P. 44
Cup holders P. 234
Cup holders P. 234
Ashtrays P. 243
Power outlet P. 245
8
SRS side airbags P. 78
Console box P. 232
A
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 60
Overhead console P. 233
Personal lights P. 229
Moon roof switch  P. 65
Interior lights P. 229
Personal lights P. 229
Interior lights P. 229
Coat hooks P. 251
SRS curtain shield airbags P. 78
Vanity mirrors P. 238
Sun visors P. 237
Garage door opener switches P. 256
Compass P. 262
: If equipped
9
Pictorial index
Interior
B
Inside door lock buttons
P. 37
Driving position memory switches
P. 45
Seat position memory switches
P. 49
Door lock switches P. 37
Outside rear view mirror
switches P. 61
Window lock switch P. 63
Power window switches P. 63
10
C
Automatic transmission shift lever P. 120
Seat heater switches P. 246
Shift lock override button P. 389
Cigarette lighter P. 244
Ashtrays P. 243
11
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
Headlight switch P. 142
Turn signal lever P. 128
Fog light switch P. 145
Paddle shift switches P. 122, 124
Gauges and meters P. 131
Multi-information display P. 138
Windshield wiper and washer switch P. 146
Engine (ignition) switch P. 116
Trunk opener main switch P. 41
Glove box P. 231
Horn P. 130
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch P. 58
Parking brake pedal P. 129
Hood release lever P. 283
12
A
Without navigation system
Air conditioning
system
P. 190
Rear window and outside rear view mirror
defoggers P. 198
Audio
system
P. 199
Clock
P. 239
Security indicator
P. 71, 73
Emergency flasher
switch P. 344
With navigation system
Navigation
system*
Clock P. 239
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers*
Security indicator
P. 71, 73
Air conditioning
system*
Audio system*
Emergency flasher
switch P. 344
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
13
Pictorial index
Instrument panel
B
Audio remote control
switches P. 225
C
Without navigation system
With navigation system
Telephone switch*
Talk switch*
“DISP” switch P. 139
Distance switch 
Distance switch 
P. 153
Cruise control switch  P. 150
Dynamic radar cruise control switch 
P. 153
14
“DISP” switch P. 139
P. 153
Cruise control switch  P. 150
Dynamic radar cruise control switch 
P. 153
D
VSC off switch P. 171
F-sport mode total control switch P. 122, 172
E
Headlight cleaner switch  P. 149
Instrument panel light
control knob P. 133
Satellite switches P. 240
Trunk opener
P. 41
Fuel filler door opener P. 68
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
15
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the
right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from
your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are
currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification
with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for
precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.
16
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left
as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of
the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,
which could lead to an accident that will hurt or kill you, your occupants or others.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers
or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts
the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or
others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette
lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
17
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the
risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its
equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.
Symbols used in illustrations
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,
“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.”
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.)
used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g.
a lid opens).
18
Before driving
1-1. Key information
Keys.............................................. 20
1-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors and trunk
Smart access system with
push-button start.................... 24
Wireless remote control......... 35
Doors ............................................ 37
1
Outside rear view mirrors........ 61
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows.......................... 63
Moon roof ................................... 65
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 68
Trunk .............................................. 41
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats................................... 44
Driving position memory
(driver’s seat) .......................... 45
Seat position memory
(front passenger’s seat) ........ 49
Head restraints ........................... 51
Seat belts ..................................... 52
Steering wheel.......................... 58
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror......................................... 60
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system..... 71
Alarm............................................ 73
Theft prevention labels
(U.S.A.)...................................... 75
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture .......... 76
SRS airbags ................................ 78
Front passenger occupant
classification system.............. 89
Child restraint systems ........... 94
Installing child restraints......... 98
19
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access
system with push-button start
(P. 24)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 35)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
■ Card key (Canada only)
Electronic key
Operating the smart access system with push-button start
(P. 24)
Mechanical key
The card key comes with an information card that includes instructions
for use. Lexus recommends that you carry the information card with
the card key.
20
1-1. Key information
Using the mechanical key
Take out the mechanical key.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the entry
function does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
(P. 391)
■ Card key
● The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a
problem arises, such as when the key does not operate properly.
● If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button
using a pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.
● To store the mechanical key in the card
key, insert it inside while pressing the
lock release button.
21
1
Before driving
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key
only has grooves on one side. If the
key cannot be inserted in a lock
cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt
to insert it.
1-1. Key information
● If the battery cover is not installed and
the battery falls out or if the battery was
removed because the key got wet, reinstall the battery with the positive terminal facing the Lexus emblem.
● The card key is not waterproof.
■ When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch off and lock the glove box as circumstances
demand. (P. 41, 231)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
electronic key only.
■ Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that
a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key
number plate. (P. 390)
22
1-1. Key information
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
Observe the following:
1
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to
such materials.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,
audio systems, glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
■ Precautions for handling the card keys
● Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key to the card key.
Doing so may damage the card key.
● If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode.
If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key,
immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To
remove the battery cover, lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is corroded, have
your Lexus dealer replace the battery.
● Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover.
Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.
● If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose.
● When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.
Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly.
● The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the
following situations:
• The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins or keys.
• The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as a tip of mechanical pencil.
• The surface of the card key is wiped with thinners or benzene.
23
Before driving
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key (including the card key) on your person, for example in your
pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 25)
Unlocks the trunk (P. 25)
Starts the engine (P. 116)
: Canada only
24
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Unlocking and locking the doors (front door handles only)
Grip the handle to unlock the
door.
The door cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the door is locked.
Press the lock button to lock the
door.
Unlocking the trunk
Press the button to unlock the
trunk.
25
1
Before driving
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Antenna location and effective range
■ Antenna location
Antennas outside cabin
Antennas inside cabin
Antenna inside trunk
Antenna outside trunk
26
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
When unlocking the trunk
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of
the trunk release button.
When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
27
1
Before driving
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of
either of the outside front
door handles. (Only the doors
detecting the key can be
operated.)
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle
may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start from
operating properly:
(Ways of coping: P. 391)
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display,
airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wire-
less communication devices
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metal-
lic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
● When another wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
● When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following devices
that emit radio waves
• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computer or personal digital assistant (PDA)
• Digital audio player
• Portable game system
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear
window
28
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 2 When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and
hold
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds,
and repeat step 2.)
Multi-information
display
1
for approximately 5 seconds while pushing
Unlocking doors
Beep
Hold the driver's door handle
to unlock only the driver's
Exterior: Beeps three
door.
times
Hold the front passenger’s
Interior: Pings once
door handle to unlock all
doors.
Hold either front door handle Exterior: Beeps twice
to unlock all doors.
Interior: Pings once
STEP 3 Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open one of the
doors.
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the doors
will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set. In case that
the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 73)
29
Before driving
,
, or
on the key.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Battery-saving function
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the
vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.
● When the entry function has not been used for 30 days or more
● When the electronic key has been left within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of the
vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when...
● The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch.
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function.
(P. 35)
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 391)
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year
and a half.)
● The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used because
the key always transmits radio waves. If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate, or the detection area
becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. ( P. 320)
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of
the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field.
•
•
•
•
•
•
TVs
Personal computers
Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
Glass top ranges
Table lamps
■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the
electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside
of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may
not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may
go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)
30
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the
system may not operate properly in the following cases.
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the
rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in
the glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes are changed.
● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be
locked or unlocked by anyone.
1
Before driving
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the
engine if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle,
such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key
is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle operation may prevent
the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original
position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of
the vehicle.
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again.
31
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the
multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable
accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in
response to any warning indications on the multi-information display. (P. 365)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only
alarms are sounded.
Alarm
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 2
seconds
Situation
Correction procedure
Tried to lock the doors using
the entry function while the
electronic key is still inside
the passenger compartment
Retrieve the electronic
key from the passenger
compartment and lock
the doors again.
Closed the trunk while the
electronic key is still inside
and all doors are locked
Retrieve the electronic
key from the trunk and
close the trunk lid.
Tried to exit the vehicle with
Exterior alarm
the electronic key and lock
sounds once for 60 the doors without first turning
seconds
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch OFF
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and lock the doors
again.
Exterior alarm
Tried to lock the vehicle using Close all of the doors
sounds once for 10 the entry function while a
and lock the doors
seconds
door is open
again.
Interior alarm
sounds continuously
32
Tried to open the door and
exit the vehicle without shifting the shift lever to P
Shift the shift lever to P.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Alarm
Situation
Correction procedure
Turned the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF while the Close the driver's door.
driver's door is open
■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(P. 391)
● Starting the engine:
P. 392
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 320
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
It is possible to deactivate the operation signals of the system, such as the emergency flashers. (Customizable featuresP. 428)
■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1
FCC ID: HYQ14AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14ABB
FCC ID: HYQ13BZH
FCC ID: HYQ14ABK
FCC ID: HYQ14ABS
FCC ID: HYQ13BZW
33
1
Before driving
Switched to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver's door
is open (Opened the driver's
Close the driver's door.
door when the “ENGINE
Interior alarm pings START STOP” switch is in
continuously
ACCESSORY mode.)
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away
from the smart access system antennas. (P. 26)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry
function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency
of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor
to see if you should disable the entry function.
● User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle and
the trunk from outside the vehicle.
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
1
Before driving
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Opens the windows and
moon roof (push and hold)
Unlocks the trunk
(push and hold)
Sounds alarm
(push and hold) (P. 73)
■ Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the
doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk:
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon
roof are operating.
■ Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds if an attempt to lock the door is made.
Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.
■ Alarm
Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P. 30
■ Security feature
P. 31
35
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 320
■ Conditions affecting operation
P. 28
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed. (Customizable features
P. 428)
■ Certification for wireless remote control
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1
FCC ID: HYQ14AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14ABB
FCC ID: HYQ13BZH
FCC ID: HYQ14ABK
FCC ID: HYQ14ABS
FCC ID: HYQ13BZW
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock switch.
■ Entry function
P. 25
1
Before driving
■ Wireless remote control
P. 35
■ Door lock switch
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
■ Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle even
if the lock buttons are in the lock
position.
37
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left
inside the vehicle.
Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected
correctly and the door may be locked.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the locks
are set.
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or cancelled:
38
Function
Operation
Shift position linked door
locking function
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors.
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.
Speed linked door locking
function
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver's door linked door
unlocking function
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is
opened within 10 seconds after turning the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:
STEP 1
The shift lever and switch positions
corresponding to the desired function to be set or canceled are
shown as follows.
Function
Shift position linked door locking
function
Shift position linked door unlocking function
Shift lever position
Switch position
P
Speed linked door locking function
Driver's door linked door unlocking
function
N
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked
and then unlocked.
39
1
Before driving
STEP 2
Close all the doors and switch the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform the step 2 within 10
seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to P or N, and
press and hold the driver's door
lock switch ( or ) for approximately 5 seconds and then
release.
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system
may not operate.
■ Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 391)
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 428)
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Always use a seat belt.
● Always lock all doors.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it
may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat.
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless
remote control.
■ Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Press the opener switch.
1
Before driving
■ Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
Entry function
P. 25
Wireless remote control
P. 35
Locking the trunk opener feature
Turn the main switch in the glove
box off to disable the trunk opener.
On
Off
The trunk lid cannot be opened
even with the wireless remote control or the entry function.
41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Trunk light
When the trunk light switch is set to on, the trunk light turns on when the trunk is
opened.
On
Off
■ Trunk handle
Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk.
Be careful not to pull the trunk lid sideways
when closing the trunk with the handle.
■ Internal trunk release lever
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling down
on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the
inside of trunk lid.
The lever will continue to glow for some time
after the trunk lid is closed.
■ Using the mechanical key
The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 391)
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the trunk lid closed.
This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also prevents
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle as they may lock themselves in the
vehicle or trunk, which could cause the child to overheat or suffocate, resulting in
death or serious injury.
43
Before driving
■ When children are in the vehicle
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Seat position switch
Seatback angle switch
Seat cushion (front) angle switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Lumbar support switch
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment
Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce
the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
44
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Driving position memory (driver’s seat)
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering
wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled with
the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.
Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.
1
Before driving
■ Entering a position to memory
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
STEP 2 Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
Push the “SET” button, then
STEP 3
within 3 seconds push button
“1”, “2” or “3” until the signal
beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previously recorded position will be
overwritten.
■ Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Push button “1”, “2” or “3” to
recall the memorized position.
45
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing
the following.
Using the wireless remote control
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the
driver's door.
While pressing the desired button
STEP 2
(“1”, “2” or “3”), push
on the
wireless remote control until the
signal beeps.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver's door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver’s
door is opened.
STEP 3
Open one of the doors
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the doors
will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set. In case that
the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 73)
46
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Using the door lock switch
Carry only the key (including the card key) to which you want to link
the driving position. If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving
position cannot be linked properly.
STEP 1
The driving position is recalled
when the driver's door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver's
door is opened.
: Canada only
47
1
Before driving
STEP 2
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the
driver's door.
While pressing the desired button
(“1”, “2” or “3”), press the lock or
unlock side on the driver’s door
lock switch until the signal beeps.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Canceling the linked door unlock operation
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door.
STEP 2 Using the wireless remote control: While pushing the “SET” button, press
on the wireless remote control until the signal beeps.
Using the door lock switch: While pressing the “SET” button, press the
lock or unlock side on the door lock switch until the signal beeps.
■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF
Memorized positions (except for the steering wheel positions) can be activated up
to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is
closed again, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
■ To cancel seat position recall
Perform any of the following operations.
● Push the “SET” button.
● Push button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).
■ If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or
squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
48
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat position memory (front passenger’s seat)
Your preferred front passenger seat position can be memorized and
recalled with the touch of a button.
Three different seat positions can be entered into memory.
1
Before driving
■ Entering a position to memory
STEP 1 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
STEP 2 Adjust the front passenger seat to the desired position.
Push the “SET” button, then
STEP 3
within 3 seconds push button
“1”, “2” or “3” until the signal
beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previously recorded position will be
overwritten.
■ Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Push button “1”, “2” or “3” to
recall the memorized position.
49
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Operating the seat position memory after turning the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch OFF
Memorized position can be activated up to 180 seconds after the front passenger
door is opened, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
■ To cancel seat position recall
Perform any of the following operations.
● Push the “SET” button.
● Push button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Adjust the seat position using the switches.
■ If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger.
50
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Head restraints
Vertical adjustment
Push and hold the lock release
button when lowering the head
restraint.
Removal
Before driving
Lock
release
button
1
Pull the head restraint up while
pushing the lock release button.
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
CAUTION
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
51
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.
■ Correct use of the seat belts
● Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle until
a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
Release button
52
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)
Down (while pressing the
height adjuster)
Up
1
Before driving
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
Seat belt comfort guide (rear seats)
If the shoulder belt sits close to a
person’s neck, slide the seat belt
comfort guide forward.
Seat belt pretensioners
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal collision.
The pretensioner may not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
53
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system)
When the pre-collision sensor detects an obstacle and determines that a
collision is unavoidable, the seat belts help lessen collision injury by
retracting the slack in the front seat belts before the collision, thus
restraining the driver and passenger at an earlier stage.
The seat belts will also operate in the event of sudden braking. (P. 176)
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if
you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that
you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is
used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully
retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 98)
■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (P. 52)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in
the same manner as other occupants. Extend
the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest.
Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a
pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.
54
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt,
follow the instructions on P. 52 regarding seat belt usage.
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from
your Lexus dealer free of charge.
55
Before driving
large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 94)
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at once, including children.
● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat
belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating
position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in a collision. (P. 53)
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so
will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the
front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the seat belt becomes locked: it cannot be fur-
ther extended, nor will it return to the stowed position. The seat belt cannot be
used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
■ Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the belt
becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out
leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs
and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
56
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed
in the door.
1
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.
● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in
a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because
the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of
death or injury in the event of a collision.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by
another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally
intended.
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
57
Before driving
Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot
protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Up
Down
Away from the driver
Toward the driver
Auto tilt away
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned OFF, the
steering wheel returns to its
stowed position by moving up and
away to enable easier driver entry
and exit.
Switching to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode will return
the steering wheel to the original
position.
58
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically
by the driving position memory. (P. 45)
1
Before driving
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
It is possible to deactivate the auto tilt-away function.
(Customizable featuresP. 428)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
59
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles
behind and automatically reduce the reflected light.
Turns automatic mode on/off
The indicator comes on when
automatic mode is turned on.
The anti-glare mirror default
mode is automatic. The antiglare mirror is automatically set
to automatic whenever the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch
is turned IGNITION ON mode.
■ To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover them.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death
or serious injury.
60
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Select a mirror to adjust
(“L”: left or “R”: right)
Adjust the mirror up, down,
in, or out using the switch
1
Before driving
■ When the mirrors are fogged up
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 198)
■ Folding back the mirrors
Push back in the direction of the vehicle's
rear.
■ One-touch adjustment of the mirror angle
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted with the touch
of a button. (P. 45)
61
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Linked mirror function when reversing
The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle
is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will
not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (between “L” and
“R”).
■ Auto anti-glare function
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside
rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (P. 60)
CAUTION
■ When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the surface of the mirror, as it may be hot.
62
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following
switches.
Closing
One-touch closing*
Opening
One-touch opening*
1
Before driving
*: Pushing the switch in the oppo-
site direction will stop window
travel partway.
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
The passenger windows can still be
opened and closed using the
driver’s switch even if the lock
switch is on.
■ The power windows can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Door lock linked window operation
● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
(P. 391)
● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.
(P. 35)
63
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ Operating the power windows after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 428)
CAUTION
■ Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some
instances, even death.
■ Jam protection function
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the window fully closes.
64
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and
down.
■ Opening and closing
1
Open
Before driving
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully opened position.
Push the switch again to fully
open.
Close
Push the switch in the either
direction to stop the moon roof
partway.
■ Tilting up and down
Tilt up
Tilt down
Push the switch in the either side to
stop the moon roof partway.
: If equipped
65
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■ The moon roof can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Moon roof open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the
instrument panel when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF and the
driver's door is opened with the moon roof open.
■ Door lock linked moon roof operation
● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 391)
● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 35)
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting
down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ To reduce moon roof wind noise
Drive with the moon roof opened to slightly before the fully open position as driving
with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind noise.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will
open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 428)
66
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
CAUTION
■ Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
1
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while
Before driving
it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a
position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■ Jam protection function
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the moon roof fully closes.
67
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
■ Before refueling the vehicle
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that all
the doors and windows are closed.
■ Opening the fuel tank cap
68
STEP 1
Press the opener switch.
STEP 2
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
STEP 3
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
1-5. Refueling
Closing the fuel tank cap
When replacing the fuel tank cap,
turn it until a clicking sound is
heard.
■ Fuel types
Use unleaded gasoline. (91 Octane rating [Research Octane Number 96] or
higher)
■ Fuel tank capacity (reference)
16.9 gal. (64 L, 14.0 Imp.gal.)
■ When the fuel filler door opener is inoperable
The lever can be used to open the fuel filler
door if the fuel filler door cannot be opened
using the inside switch because the battery is
discharged or for any other reason.
69
Before driving
After releasing your hand, the cap
will turn slightly to the opposite
direction.
1
1-5. Refueling
CAUTION
■ Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
● Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.
Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to
ignite.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until
the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to
come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■ When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted
surface.
70
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine
from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's
on-board computer.
1
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
Before driving
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned OFF to
indicate that the system is operating.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key
with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
71
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the key
Do not modify, remove or disable the engine immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
72
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Alarm
The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry is
detected.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm is triggered in the following situations.
1
Before driving
● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other
than using the entry function, wireless remote door lock function
or mechanical key with the alarm being set.
● The hood is opened with the alarm being set.
■ Setting the alarm system
Close the doors, trunk and
hood, and lock all doors using
the entry function, wireless
remote door lock function or
mechanical key.
The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the
system is set.
■ Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm.
● Unlock the doors or trunk using the entry function, wireless
remote door lock function or mechanical key.
● Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped
after a few seconds.)
73
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the
following.
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Panic mode
When
is pushed for longer than about
one second, an alarm will sound for about 60
seconds and the vehicle lights will flash to
deter any person from trying to break into or
damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, push any button on the
wireless remote control.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations.
Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood.
● The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked.
■ When the battery is disconnected
Be sure to deactivate the alarm system.
If the battery is disconnected before deactivating the alarm system, the alarm may
be triggered when the battery is reconnected.
74
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)
These labels are attached to the
vehicle to reduce vehicle theft
by facilitating the tracing and
recovery of parts from stolen
vehicles. Do not remove under
penalty of law.
1
Before driving
75
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 44)
Adjust the position of the seat
forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached
and
easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 44)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily operable.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest.
(P. 58)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 51)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 52)
76
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ While driving
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
1
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and
stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment
mechanism may also be damaged.
■ Adjusting the seat position:
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are
not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
77
Before driving
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or
serious injury to the driver or passenger.
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They
work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components.
SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection.
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.
SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants.
78
1-7. Safety information
Airbag system components
1
Before driving
Knee airbags
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbags
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
Side airbags
Side and curtain shield airbag
sensors
Curtain shield airbag sensors
SRS warning light
Driver airbag
Driver's seat belt buckle switch
Driver's seat position sensor
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Airbag sensor assembly
Front passenger occupant
classification system
(ECU and sensors)
Front airbag sensors
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system
controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The
driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. The
front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant
classification sensor etc.
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.
79
1-7. Safety information
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system
triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors,
side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor
assemblies, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
(P. 356)
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)
SRS airbag.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel, airbag cover and inflator) as well as
the front seats, and parts of the front pillar, rear pillar and roof side rail, may be
hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
■ Operating conditions (front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the frontal impact is above the
designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 15 mph (25 km/h) collision when the vehicle impacts straight into a fixed barrier that does not move
or deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehi-
cle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
● The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting
in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if
luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 89)
80
1-7. Safety information
■ Operating conditions (side and curtain shield airbags)
● The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the
passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side.
● The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passen-
1
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli-
sion
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of
your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or vehicle falling
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of
the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
81
Before driving
ger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.
(P. 89)
1-7. Safety information
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag
(side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle
is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of
the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is
involved in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
82
1-7. Safety information
■ When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
● A portion of the doors is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
● The pad section of the steering wheel, front
passenger airbag cover or lower portion of
the instrument panel is scratched, cracked,
or otherwise damaged.
● The surface of the seats with the side air-
bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars
or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
83
Before driving
deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.
1
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or
serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a
clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering
wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm)
distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the
back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to
see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
84
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If the seat belt extender has been con-
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can
cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the
airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with
the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-
ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a
seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle
and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.
(P. 94)
85
1
Before driving
nected to the driver's seat belt buckle but
the seat belt extender has not also been
fastened to the latch plate of the driver's
seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system
will judge that the driver is wearing the seat
belt even though the seat belt has not been
connected. In this case, the driver's airbag
may not activate correctly in a collision,
resulting in death or serious injury in the
event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat
belt with the seat belt extender.
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on
the knees of a front passenger.
● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or
passenger have items resting on their
knees.
● Do not lean against the door, the roof side
rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-
senger seat toward the door or put their
head or hands outside the vehicle.
86
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not attach anything to or lean anything
● Do not attach anything to areas such as the
door, windshield glass, side door glass,
front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist
grip.
● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
● If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploys, be
sure to remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags
inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components shown on P. 79.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or
window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any
residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and
front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus
dealer.
87
1
Before driving
against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the
instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when
SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer.
The SRS airbag may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or
serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side
rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar
etc.)
● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
88
1-7. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and
activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger.
1
Before driving
SRS warning light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
89
1-7. Safety information
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■ Adult*1
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
Indicator/
SRS warning light
warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seat
Devices
Front passenger knee airbag
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
“AIR BAG
ON”
Off
Flashing*2
Activated
■ Child *3 or child restraint system*4
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
Indicator/
SRS warning light
warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seat
Devices
Front passenger knee airbag
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
90
“AIR BAG
OFF” *5
Off
Flashing*2
Deactivated
Activated
1-7. Safety information
■ Unoccupied
Indicator/
warning light
■ There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/
warning light
Devices
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
passenger seat
Front passenger knee airbag
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
“AIR BAG
OFF”
On
Off
Deactivated
Activated
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an
adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
91
1
Before driving
Devices
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indiNot illuminated
cator lights
SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front
Deactivated
passenger seat
Front passenger knee airbag
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Activated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Deactivated
1-7. Safety information
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 94)
*5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for
installing the child restraint system properly. (P. 98)
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the
buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the
seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure
the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the front passenger side and front passenger knee airbag may
not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of
collision.
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on
the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on
the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This
may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates
that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
92
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illu-
● When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
in the proper order. (P. 98)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,
the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-
backs.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
93
1
Before driving
minated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit
up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of
child restraint systems.
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much
safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(P. 98)
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according
to the age and size of the child.
Infant seat
94
1-7. Safety information
Convertible seat
1
Before driving
Booster seat
■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and
use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 52)
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must
be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on
the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
95
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to
the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even
if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may allowed to be installed on the front
passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires
a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no
top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as
upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be
killed or seriously injured.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other
passengers in the event of collision.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof side rail from which the
side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags
inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not
secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
96
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Child restraint lock function belt precaution
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.
Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or
store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
97
1
Before driving
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the belt
becomes twisted around a child's neck, it will not be possible to pull the belt out
leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the rear seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat
belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
Child restraint
LATCH anchors are provided
for the rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the
anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint locking mechanism
(ALR/ELR belts except driver’s
seat belt) (P. 52)
Anchor bracket (for top tether
strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for each rear seat.
98
1-7. Safety information
Installation with LATCH system
Type A
Canada only
99
1
Before driving
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
STEP 2 Latch the hooks onto the
LATCH anchors.
STEP 3 If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether
strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
STEP 1
1-7. Safety information
Type B
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
STEP 2 Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors.
STEP 3 If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether
strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
STEP 1
Canada only
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■ Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child seat on the rear
STEP 1
seat facing the rear of the vehicle.
100
1-7. Safety information
STEP 2
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
then allow it to retract slightly in
order to activate the ALR lock
mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
STEP 4
While pushing the child seat down
into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child
seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■ Forward facing Convertible seat
Place the child seat on the seat
STEP 1
facing the front of the vehicle.
101
1
Before driving
STEP 3
Run the seat belt through the child
seat and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
1-7. Safety information
STEP 2
STEP 3
Run the seat belt through the child
seat and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder strap and
then allow it to retract slightly into
the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
STEP 4
While pushing the child seat into
the rear seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child seat is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether
strap, the top tether strap should
be latched onto the top tether strap
anchors.
102
1-7. Safety information
■ Booster seat
STEP 1
Place the booster seat on the seat
facing the front of the vehicle.
1
Sit the child in the booster seat. Fit
the seat belt to the booster seat
according to the manufacturer's
instructions and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's
shoulder, and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 52)
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
103
Before driving
STEP 2
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
STEP 1
STEP 2
Secure the child restraint using a
seat belt or the lower anchors, and
lock the head restraint in place at
the lowest position.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
CAUTION
■ When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock
mode: (P. 54)
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to
the child.
104
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.
● Only put a forward facing or booster child
seat on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward facing or
booster child seat on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible
even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated. Failing to do so may result in
death or serious injury if the airbags deploy
(inflate).
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away
from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to
do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or sudden
braking.
● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
● Push and pull the child restraint system from side to side and forward to be sure it
is secure.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-
turer.
105
1
Before driving
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix
the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt
will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a collision.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around
the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure
the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
106
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving the vehicle................. 108
Cruise control.......................... 150
Engine (ignition) switch.......... 116
Automatic transmission ........ 120
Dynamic radar cruise
control ..................................... 153
Turn signal lever....................... 128
Intuitive parking assist........... 163
Parking brake........................... 129
Driving assist systems............. 169
Horn ............................................ 130
PCS (Pre-Collision
System) .................................... 176
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters................. 131
2-5. Driving information
Indicators and warning
lights ......................................... 135
Cargo and luggage ................ 180
Multi-information display..... 138
Winter driving tips.................. 184
Vehicle load limits................... 183
Trailer towing ........................... 186
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Dinghy towing.......................... 187
Headlight switch...................... 142
Fog light switch ........................ 145
Windshield wipers and
washer ..................................... 146
Headlight cleaner switch...... 149
107
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.
■ Starting the engine (P. 116)
■ Driving
STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 120)
STEP 2 Release the parking brake.
(P. 129)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■ Stopping
STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
STEP 3
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the
shift lever to P or N.
(P. 120)
■ Parking the vehicle
STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2 Set the parking brake.
(P. 129)
STEP 3 Shift the shift lever to P.
(P. 120)
STEP 4 Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the engine.
STEP 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on
your person.
Starting on a steep uphill
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
108
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Starting off on a hill
Hill-start assist control will operate. (P. 169)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows
may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially
slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because
■ Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to
observe:
● For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
•
•
•
•
Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding down.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P. 405)
■ Normal characteristics after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is because fuel evaporation leakage
check is performed. It does not indicate a malfunction.
109
When driving
there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing
the steering and brakes from operating properly.
2
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When starting off
To prevent the vehicle from creeping forward, keep the brake pedal firmly
depressed when shifting the shift lever.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator
pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
● Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or
roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check
that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver
drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P, R or N while the vehicle
is moving.
Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission system and may result
in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the engine brake to not operate properly and lead to an
accident.
110
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
● Do not turn the engine off while driving.
The power steering and brake booster systems will not operate properly if the
engine is not running.
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a
steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 122, 124)
● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to
● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside
rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may
result in death or serious injury.
● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are
not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do
not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability
tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on
your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce
your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting
or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that
the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from
functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
111
When driving
prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.
2
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and
check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the engine is running to prevent an
accident caused by the vehicle moving.
● To prevent the vehicle from moving and causing an accident, apply the brake
pedal or parking brake when stopping the vehicle on a hill.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-
cle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following.
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic
material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of
the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock
the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes or rear bumper exhaust diffusers while the engine
is running or immediately after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is
snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running,
exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
112
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such
as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
● The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or
depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine
overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust
gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking the vehicle
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of
the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may
not securely hold the vehicle.
● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles
closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than
usual. Braking distance may also increase.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systems
fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.
113
When driving
corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow
exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
2
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals together
to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the
vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long
time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag-
ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
Moderate levels of the brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced front braking
power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs.
Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also have
the thickness of the discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
that of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
● The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Replace a flat tire with a new one. (P. 381)
114
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the
following serious damage to the vehicle.
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission,
differential, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where
possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
115
2
When driving
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to
have your Lexus dealer check the following.
2-1. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on
your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes.
■ Starting the engine
STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in P.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green.
STEP 4
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
The engine can be started from
any mode.
116
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time
the switch is pressed.)
OFF*
Emergency flashers can be
used.
2
ACCESSORY mode
When driving
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can be
used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off
the engine, the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will be
switched to ACCESSORY
mode, not to OFF.
117
2-1. Driving procedures
■ If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 71)
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator will flash in green and a message will be
shown on the multi-information display. Press
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch again
while turning the steering wheel left and right.
■ When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
■ Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the shift lever
in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn OFF.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P. 30
■ When the electronic key battery is discharged
P. 320
■ Conditions affecting operation
P. 28
■ Note for the entry function
P. 31
118
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not press the accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Stopping the engine in an emergency
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode for long periods without the engine running.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
119
2
When driving
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, push and
hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving except in
an emergency. If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to
an unexpected accident.
2-1. Driving procedures
Automatic transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■ Shifting the shift lever and selecting a shift position
While the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is
in IGNITION ON
mode, depress the brake
pedal and move the shift
lever.
Shift
position
Function
P
Parking the vehicle/
starting the engine
R
Reversing
N
Neutral
D
Normal driving*
M
M mode driving
(P. 124)
*: To improve fuel efficiency and
reduce noises, set the shift lever
in the D position for normal driving.
120
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Shift position uses
Shift position
Display
Purpose
Normal D
position driving
Gears
between 1 and
8 are automatically
selected
according to
driving conditions
Shift range
selection
(P. 122)
Allows optimum use of
engine braking
2
When driving
(paddle shift
switches activated)
Function
Allows the
Individual gear
driver to select
selection
gears for
(P. 124)
sporty driving
121
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Selecting a driving mode
The following modes can be selected to suit driving conditions
Snow mode
For accelerating and driving
on slippery road surfaces,
such as on snow.
“Sport” mode
(P. 172)
To cancel a mode, press the
same side of the switch again.
Selecting shift ranges in the D position
To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-”paddle shift
switch. The shift range can then be selected by operating the “-” and “+”
paddle shift switches. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the
highest gear, preventing unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of
engine braking force to be selected.
Higher shift range
Lower shift range
The selected shift range, from 1 to
8, will be displayed in the meter
cluster.
To return to normal D position
driving, the “+” paddle shift switch
must be held down for a period of
time.
122
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Shift ranges and their functions
Meter cluster display*
Function
Gears between 1 and 8 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
7
Gears between 1 and 7 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
6
Gears between 1 and 6 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
5
Gears between 1 and 5 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
4
Gears between 1 and 4 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
3
Gears between 1 and 3 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
2
Gears between 1 and 2 are automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions
1
The gear is set at 1
2
When driving
8
*: “D” is also displayed to indicate the shift position.
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift
range.
123
2-1. Driving procedures
Selecting gears in the M position
To enter M mode, shift the shift lever to the M position. Gears can then be
selected by operating the shift lever or paddle shift switches, allowing you
to drive in the gear of your choosing.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The gear changes once every time
the shift lever or paddle shift switch
is operated.
The selected gear, from 1 to 8, will
be displayed in the meter cluster.
When in the M position, the gear will not change unless the shift lever or
paddle shift switches are operated.
However, even when in the M position, the gears will be automatically
changed in the following situations:
● When vehicle speed drops (downshift only).
● When the automatic transmission fluid or engine coolant temperature
is low.
124
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Gear functions
Meter cluster display*
Function
The gear is fixed at 8th gear
7
The gear is fixed at 7th gear
6
The gear is fixed at 6th gear
5
The gear is fixed at 5th gear
4
The gear is fixed at 4th gear
3
The gear is fixed at 3rd gear
2
The gear is fixed at 2nd gear
1
The gear is fixed at 1st gear
2
When driving
8
*: “M” is also displayed to indicate the shift position.
■ When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position
● When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position, a shift range will
be automatically selected. The highest gear of the first shift range will be one
gear lower than the gear in use during normal D position driving.
● If the “-” paddle shift switch is operated when in range 6 or above, the shift
range may be lowered by two ranges or more in accordance with the driving
conditions.
■ Automatic deactivated of shift range selection in the D position
Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:
● When the vehicle comes to a stop
● If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time in
one shift range
■ Rev buzzer
If the engine speed approaches the red zone, a buzzer will sound once to encourage the driver to upshift.
125
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Downshift restrictions warning buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
■ When driving with the cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control
Engine braking will not occur during shift range selection in the D position, even
when downshifting to range 7, 6, 5 or 4. (P. 150, 153)
■ Automatic deactivation of snow mode and “Sport” mode
If the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF after driving in either snow
mode or “Sport” mode, the mode is automatically deactivated.
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 389
■ If
is not displayed after shifting the shift lever to M
● Within a few seconds of turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode, the transmission will not go into M mode if the shift lever is
moved to the M position. This is because a system check is being performed. In
this case, wait a moment and then try moving the shift lever to the M position
again.
● If the display does not change to
on an occasion other than that
described above, it may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission
system. Have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ Automatic gear selection when the vehicle is stopped
● When the vehicle comes to a stop, the transmission will automatically downshift
to allow you to start off in 1st gear.
● When the vehicle is idling at high rpm in order to warm up, and the vehicle is on
a slippery road, the transmission will automatically shift to 2nd gear for stopping
and starting off.
126
2-1. Driving procedures
■ If the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light comes on
■ AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the optimal gear according to driver performance and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. However, operating the “-” paddle shift switch will restrict the function’s operation. (Shifting the shift lever to the M position cancels the function.)
CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.
127
2
When driving
If the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light comes on while driving,
make sure you return to normal D position
driving and reduce speed by easing off the
accelerator pedal. Stop the vehicle in a safe
place, shift the shift lever to the P position and
let the engine idle until the warning light goes
out.
When the warning light goes out, the vehicle
can be driven again.
If the warning light does not go out after waiting a while, have your vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
Right turn
Left turn
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change
The right hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change
The left hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
■ Turn signals can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
128
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake
Sets the parking brake*
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)
*: Fully
depress the parking
brake pedal with your left
foot while depressing the
brake pedal with your right
foot.
2
When driving
CANADA U.S.A.
NOTICE
■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
129
2-1. Driving procedures
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the
mark.
130
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
2
When driving
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may
differ depending on the model/type.
The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Voltage gauge
Displays the battery voltage. If the voltage is either too high or too low, the
display will flash.
Shift position and shift range/gear display
Displays the shift position along with the currently selected shift range or
gear. (P. 122, 124)
Multi-information display
P. 138
Engine oil temperature gauge
Displays the engine oil temperature. If the temperature is too high, the display will flash.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
131
2-2. Instrument cluster
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Odometer and trip meter
Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since
the meter was last reset. Trip meters “A” and “B” can be
used to record and display different distances independently.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding
the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.
132
2-2. Instrument cluster
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter
2
When driving
CAUTION
■ When the temperature of the display is extremely low
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the shift position and shift
range/gear display. At extremely low temperatures, the display may respond slowly,
and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s downshifting and the new gear
number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again,
causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
133
2-2. Instrument cluster
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi-
cates the maximum engine speed.
● The following may indicate that the engine is overheating. Immediately stop the
vehicle in a safe place. (P. 397)
• The engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H)
• The display on the engine oil temperature gauge flashes
■ When driving the vehicle
If the display on the voltage gauge starts to flash while the engine is running, it may
indicate that there is a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system. Have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
134
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center
panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Instrument cluster
2
When driving
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may
differ depending on the model/type.
Center panel
135
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 128)
Headlight high beam indicator (P. 142)
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Headlight indicator
(P. 142)
* “AFS OFF” indicator
(P. 143)
(if equipped)
Intuitive parking assist
indicator (P. 163)
Tail light indicator
(P. 142)
*
Front fog light indicator
(P. 145)
* “VSC OFF” indicator
“SNOW” indicator
(P. 122)
* SRS airbag on-off indica-
“SPORT” indicator
(P. 122, 172)
136
Cruise control indicator
(P. 150, 153)
Slip indicator (P. 170)
(P. 171)
tor (P. 89)
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems. (P. 355)
*
*
*
(U.S.A.)
*
*
(Canada)
*
(U.S.A.)
*
*
(Canada)
(Canada)
*
*
*
(U.S.A.)
(if equipped)
*
*
(for front
passenger)
When driving
(for
driver)
2
*: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on,
or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on
when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to
help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.
137
2-2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data, including the current outside air temperature.
● Trip information
(P. 139)
Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruisingrelated information.
● Satellite switch mode display
(P. 240)
This switch is used to configure
various function settings.
● Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped)
(P. 163)
Automatically displayed when
using intuitive parking assist.
● Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped)
(P. 153)
Automatically displayed when
using dynamic radar cruise control.
● Warning messages
(P. 365)
Automatically displayed when a
malfunction occurs in one of the
vehicle’s systems.
138
2-2. Instrument cluster
Trip information
Without navigation system
Display items can be switched by
pushing the “DISP” switch.
2
When driving
With navigation system
■ Outside temperature
Displays the outside air temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed is from
-40F (-40C) to 122F (50C).
When the temperature drops to 37F (3C), the digits of the display will flash for 10 seconds.
139
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Driving range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can
be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
• This distance is computed based on your average fuel
consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can
be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank,
the display may not be updated.
■ Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
function was reset.
The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP” switch
for longer than one second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.
■ Average fuel consumption after refueling
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
vehicle was last refueled.
■ Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
■ Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine
was started or the function was reset.
The function can be reset by pushing the “DISP” switch
for longer than one second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
140
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Gear position display
Indicates the current gear, and the range of gears
that is available when the shift lever is in the D position. The gear range is shown by the number of dots
() and the current gear is shown as a number. The
transmission automatically selects the gears within
the driver selected gear range.
When in the M position, the “F” mark is displayed.
■ Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change.
● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
CAUTION
■ The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver's downshifting and the new gear
number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again,
causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
141
2
When driving
In the illustration to the left, a range of 8 available gears
(1 through 8) has been selected by the driver. (The shift
lever is in the D position with 8 ranges enabled) It is
possible for the transmission to automatically select
between all 8 of the gears. In this case, the transmission
has selected third gear.
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
U.S.A.
CANADA
The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights
turn on.
The headlights and all
lights listed above turn
on.
The headlights, parking
lights and other lights
turn on and off automatically.
(When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is
in IGNITION ON
mode)
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push the
lever forward to turn on the high
beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
Pull the lever toward you to turn
on the high beams.
Release to turn them off. You can
flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
142
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
AFS (Adaptive Front—lighting System)
AFS (Adaptive Front—lighting System) improves visibility at intersections
and on curves by automatically adjusting the level of the headlights
according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire angle that are controlled by steering input.
Operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
■ Deactivating AFS
How to switch: P. 240
2
■ Daytime running light system
To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake
is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
■ Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.
143
When driving
The “AFS OFF” indicator turns on when the AFS is deactivated.
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds
after a door is opened and closed if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has
been switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. (The lights turn off
immediately if
on the key is pressed after all doors are locked.)
● When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF and driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch
or
.
off once and then back to
■ Automatic headlight leveling system
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of
passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do
not interfere with other road users.
■ If the “AFS OFF” indicator flashes...
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 428)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
144
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain
or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.
Front fog lights off
Front fog lights on
2
When driving
145
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
With “AUTO” selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the
sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in
accordance with rain volume.
Rain-sensing wiper operation
Low speed wiper operation
High speed wiper operation
Temporary operation
Wash/wipe operation
Wipers operate automatically.
(After operating several times,
the wipers operate one more
time after a short delay to prevent dripping.)
Only for the first time when the
windshield washer is operated
after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode with the headlights on, the headlight cleaners
will also operate once.
146
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation
With the settings other than “AUTO” also, the time until drip prevention wiper
sweep occurs is changed depending on vehicle speed.
Low speed wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from low
speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
■ “AUTO” mode
The sensitivity of sensor can be adjusted by
turning the knob.
Increases the sensitivity
Decreases the sensitivity
■ Outside rear view mirror defogger activation linked to windshield wiper opera-
tion
The outside rear view mirror defogger automatically turns on when you operate the
windshield wipers.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 428)
147
When driving
The raindrop sensor judges the amount of
raindrops.
2
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the
windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your fingers or
anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you
and held continually.
148
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight cleaner switch
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
Press the switch to clean the
headlights.
2
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the
headlight switch is turned on.
■ Windshield washer linked operation
Only for the first time when the windshield washer is operated after the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode with the headlights on, the
headlight cleaners will also operate once. (P. 146)
NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not use this function when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause the
washer fluid pump to overheat.
: If equipped
149
When driving
■ The headlight cleaner can be operated when
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelerator.
■ Set the vehicle speed
STEP 1
Turn the “ON-OFF” button on.
Push the button once more to
deactivate the cruise control.
STEP 2
Accelerate or decelerate to the
desired speed and press the
lever down to set the cruise
control speed.
: If equipped
150
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is obtained.
Fine adjustment of the set
speed (approximately 1.0 mph
[1.6 km/h]) can be made by
lightly pressing the lever up or
down and releasing it.
2
When driving
■ Canceling and resuming regular acceleration
Cancel
Push the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are
applied.
Resume
To resume cruise control and
return to the set speed, push the
lever up.
■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in the D position. However, it cannot be set if any of the ranges 1
through 3 has been selected using the paddle shift switches.
● Vehicle speed is between approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and 125 mph
(200 km/h).
151
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally.
■ Automatic cruise control cancellation
The set speed is automatically cancelled in any of the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle
speed
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40km/h)
● VSC is activated
● The shift lever is shifted to the M position.
● When the shift lever is in the D position and any of the ranges 1 through 3 is
selected using the “-” paddle shift switch.
■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Turn the “ON-OFF” button off once, and then reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately
after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause serious or
fatal accident.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
152
2-4. Using other driving systems
Dynamic radar cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control
with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates
in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
2
When driving
■ Select cruise mode
Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Turn the “ON-OFF” button on.
Push the button once more to
deactivate.
: If equipped
153
2-4. Using other driving systems
Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
Turn the “ON-OFF” button
on.
Push the button once more to
deactivate.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is always reset when
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is switched to IGNITION
ON mode.
Switch to constant speed
control mode.
(Push and hold for approximately one second.)
■ Driving in the selected cruise control mode
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed and
press the lever down to set.
154
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is displayed.
Fine Adjustment (1mph increments) Momentarily move the
lever in the desired direction
and release.
2
When driving
Course Adjustment (5mph
increments) HOLD the lever in
the desired direction. Coarse
adjustment will continute to
change the set speed approximately 5mph per second until
the lever is released.
■ Canceling and resuming the speed setting
Cancel
Push the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied.
Resume
To resume cruise control and
155
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Preceding
vehicle mark
Each push of the switch changes
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is automatically set to the long
mode when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is
switched to IGNITION ON
mode.
A mark will be displayed to indicate the presence of the vehicle
if a vehicle is running ahead of
you.
156
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles
within 328 ft. (100 m) ahead and to judge the distance between your
vehicle and those vehicles.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close when traveling on long downhill slopes.
2
When driving
Example of constant speed cruising (when there are no vehicles
ahead): When set to 62 mph (100 km/h)
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch.
Example of deceleration cruising (when the vehicle ahead is driving
slower than the set speed): When fixed speed cruising is set at 62 mph
(100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in
vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone
warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your
vehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead.
157
2-4. Using other driving systems
Example of follow-up cruising (when following a vehicle driving slower
than the set speed): When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and
the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the
speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.
Example of acceleration (when there are no longer vehicles driving
slower than the set speed in the lane ahead): When the speed is set to
62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead driving at 50 mph (80
km/h) is out of the lane
When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly
accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns to
fixed speed cruising.
■ Dynamic radar cruise control warning lights, messages and buzzers
Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or
to alert you to the need for caution while driving. (P. 365)
■ The dynamic radar cruise can be set when
● The shift lever is in the D position. However, it cannot be set if any of the ranges 1
through 3 has been selected using the paddle shift switches.
● Vehicle speed is between approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) and 85 mph (135
km/h).
■ Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally.
158
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations.
● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)
● VSC is activated.
● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.
● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed.
● The F-sport mode total control switch is set to snow mode.
2
● The shift lever is shifted to the M position.
selected using the “-” paddle shift switch.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other
reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Automatically cancelling constant speed control
The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed is more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle
speed
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)
● VSC is activated.
● The shift lever is shifted to the M position.
● When the shift lever is in the D position and any of the ranges 1 through 3 is
selected using the “-” paddle shift switch.
■ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond
to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/
decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Distance options
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long
Approximately 164 ft. (50 m)
Medium
Approximately 132 ft. (40 m)
Short
Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
159
When driving
● When the shift lever is in the D position and any of the ranges 1 through 3 is
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Radar sensor and grille cover
Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic
objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
Grille cover
Radar sensor
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR003
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
FCC RF exposure information
Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
160
2-4. Using other driving systems
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
2
■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control
■ To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control activation
Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause serious or
fatal accident.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● Where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients
● At entrances to expressways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors
from functioning correctly (heavy rain, fog, snow, sandstorm, etc.)
● Where buzzer can be heard often
161
When driving
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not
appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle
and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc.
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ When the radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in
front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the proximity alarm (P. 365) will not be activated, and an accident may result.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function
correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may
not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result.
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-
ing of the sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk, etc.)
● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
■ To ensure the radar sensor functions correctly
Do not do the following to the sensor or grille cover as doing so may cause the sensor not to function correctly and could result in an accident.
● Stick or attach anything to them
● Leave them dirty
● Disassemble, or subject them to strong shocks
● Modify or paint them
● Replace them with non-genuine parts
162
2-4. Using other driving systems
Intuitive parking assist
The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via
the multi-information display and a buzzer when parallel parking or
maneuvering into a garage. Always check the surrounding area when
using this system.
For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, refer to the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for further details.
■ Types of sensors
2
When driving
Front corner sensors
Rear corner sensors
Back sensors
■ Multi-information display (P. 138)
Front corner sensor operation
Rear corner sensor operation
Back sensor operation
: If equipped
163
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Switching the intuitive parking assist on (P. 240)
When on, an indicator is displayed to inform the driver that
the function is operational.
The display and buzzer system
■ Corner sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle
The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) of an obstacle.
Approximately 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm)
to 1.6 ft. (50 cm) from the obstacle
Approximately 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
to 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) from the
obstacle
Flashing: Within 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
of the obstacle
164
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Back sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle
The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) of an obstacle.
● The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle. When the
vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer
sounds continuously.
•
•
Corner sensors: Approximately 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
Back sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
● When two or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle.
165
2
When driving
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
to 4.9 ft. (150 cm) from the
obstacle
Approximately 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to
2.0 ft. (60 cm) from the obstacle
Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm) to
1.5 ft. (45 cm) from the obstacle
Flashing: Within 1.1 ft. (35 cm) of
the obstacle
■ Buzzer operation and distance to the obstacle
A buzzer sounds when the corner sensors and back sensor are operating.
2-4. Using other driving systems
Detection range of the sensors
Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors cannot detect obstacles
that are extremely close to the
vehicle.
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object etc.
166
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Sensor detection information
● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the
ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this
may occur are listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
•
● The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particu-
lar attention to the following obstacles.
•
•
•
•
•
Wires, fences, ropes etc.
Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb radio waves
Sharply-angled objects
Low obstacles
Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your
vehicle
■ If the display flashes and a message is displayed
P. 365
167
2
When driving
There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor.
The sensor is frozen.
The sensor is covered in any way.
The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines,
air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.
• A towing eyelet is installed.
• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their
shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they
are.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
Cet appareil ISM est conforme à la norme NMB-001 du Canada.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 428)
CAUTION
■ Caution when using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.
● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
● Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.
NOTICE
■ Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
168
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware,
however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied
upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.
2
■ Brake assist
When driving
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces.
■ TRAC (Traction Control)
Maintains drive power and prevents the rear wheels from spinning when
starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
■ Hill-start assist control
Prevents the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on an incline or
slippery slope.
■ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel.
■ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)
Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, hill-start
assist control, and EPS systems.
Maintains vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by
controlling the brakes and engine output.
When the “SPORT” side of the F-sport mode total control switch is
pressed, “Sport” mode is activated. (P. 172)
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
P. 176
169
2-4. Using other driving systems
When the VSC/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, rolling backwards when
starting on an incline, or if the rear
wheels spin, the slip indicator light
flashes to indicate that the VSC/
TRAC/hill-start assist control systems have been engaged.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to
indicate that VSC is operating.
The stop lights and high mounted
stoplight turn on when the hill-start
assist control system is operating.
170
2-4. Using other driving systems
To disable TRAC and/or VSC
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may
reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the
system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■ Turning off TRAC
Quickly push and release the button to turn off TRAC.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
The slip indicator will flash when
the LSD function is operating.
(P. 173)
■ Turning off TRAC and VSC
Push and hold the button for more
than 3 seconds while the vehicle is
stopped to turn off TRAC and
VSC.
The slip indicator light and “VSC
OFF” indicator light should come
on.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
The slip indicator will flash when
the LSD function is operating.
(P. 173)
171
When driving
The slip indicator light should come
on.
2
2-4. Using other driving systems
F-sport mode total control switch
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of control modes to accommodate various driving preferences. The control modes can be selected with
the F-sport mode total control switch. “Normal” mode allows secure and
smooth normal driving. When the “SPORT” side of the switch is pressed,
“Sport” mode is activated. Control characteristics such as the ECT, EPS,
VSC and TRAC are adjusted to afford maneuverability closer to what a
driver may have imagined, while a sense of security is retained.
“Sport” mode/“Normal” mode
The “SPORT” indicator comes on
when in “Sport” mode.
■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC
Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF after turning off the TRAC and
VSC systems will automatically re-enable them.
■ Automatic TRAC reactivation
If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle
speed increases.
■ Automatic TRAC and VSC reactivation
If the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when
vehicle speed increases.
172
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC and hill-start
assist control systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that
a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operat-
ing. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
2
■ LSD function
The LSD function is part of TRAC control. It maintains drive power by applying the
brakes to wheels that spin when accelerating during a turn, and operates even
when TRAC or TRAC/VSC operation is turned off. However, it will not operate
when the rear brakes are at a high temperature.
■ Hill-start assist control is operational when
● The shift lever is in the D or M position.
● The brake pedal is not depressed.
■ EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Reduced effectiveness of EPS
The effectiveness of EPS is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when
there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel
may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or
stop the vehicle and turn the engine OFF. The system should return to normal within
10 minutes.
■ Automatic deactivation of “Sport” mode
When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF after driving in “Sport”
mode, the mode is automatically deactivated.
173
When driving
•
•
•
•
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded.
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of normal condi-
tions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads
■ TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■ If hill-start assist control does not operate effectively
The hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads
covered in ice.
■ When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
■ When TRAC and VSC are off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As
there are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off TRAC
and VSC unless necessary.
174
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the designated size and total load capacity, and of the
same brand and tread pattern. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the
recommended tire pressure level.
The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on
the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
2
■ Handling of tires and suspension
175
When driving
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
2-4. Using other driving systems
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
Safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically
engaged to help lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as vehicle
damage when the radar sensor detects an unavoidable frontal collision.
■ Pre-collision seat belts
The seat belts are immediately retracted as the effect of the pretensioner is
increased (P. 53), to provide even greater constraining force to protect
the driver and passengers. In the event of sudden braking or skidding, the
system will operate even if no obstacle has been detected.
■ Pre-collision brake assist
Applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is
depressed.
Radar sensor
Detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and
determines whether a collision is
imminent based on the position,
speed, and heading of the obstacles.
Grille cover
Radar sensor
■ Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles,
trees, or snowdrifts.
: If equipped
176
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ The pre-collision system is operational when
● Pre-collision seat belt (linked to the radar sensor)
• Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming
vehicle exceeds about 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Pre-collision seat belts (linked to brake operation)
• Vehicle speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Pre-collision brake assist
2
■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of collision
● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
● When driving over a narrow iron bridge
● When there is a metal object on the road surface
● When driving on an uneven road surface
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force
greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 355, 365)
177
When driving
• Vehicle speed is above 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle is
greater than 18 to 24 mph (30 to 40 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR003
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
FCC RF exposure information
Radio frequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
178
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.
● Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille guard or surrounding
area.
● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille.
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
179
2
When driving
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area are subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure
all items are secured in place.
● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5150) = 650
lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
180
2-5. Driving information
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is
not designed for trailer towing.
Example on your vehicle
2
When driving
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding
in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 660 lb. (300 kg), the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
660 lb. — 366 lb. = 294 lb. (300 kg —166 kg = 134 kg)
In this condition, if 2 more passengers with the combined weight of 258 lb.
(176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:
294 lb. — 258 lb. = 36 lb. (134 kg — 117 kg = 17 kg)
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases,
the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of the occupants who got on later, by an amount. In other words, if an increase in the
number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must
reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
181
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk.
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
● Do not place items in or on the following locations:
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• Package tray (behind the rear seatback)
• Instrument panel
• Dashboard
Items placed in the above locations could get thrown around in the event of sudden braking or an accident and injure the vehicle occupants.
In addition, items could block the driver’s field of vision or move during sharp
acceleration or turning. If items move about they may get under the brake or
accelerator pedals, preventing them from being depressed properly, or hit the
driver or passengers. In these situations, the driver’s control of the vehicle could
be impaired, causing an accident.
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure some-
one during an accident or sudden braking.
■ Luggage capacity and distribution
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so will not only put load on the
tires, but also reduce steering and braking performance. This could lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or even death.
● Do not overload the vehicle.
● Do not apply load to the vehicle unevenly.
182
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing
capacity and cargo capacity.
■ Total load capacity: 660 lb. (300 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and
luggage.
■ Seating capacity: 4 occupants (Front 2, Rear 2)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
2
When driving
■ Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
■ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and
the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(P. 311)
CAUTION
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.
183
2-5. Driving information
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the
vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the
prevailing weather conditions.
■ Pre-winter preparations
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of
battery electrolyte.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires.
Ensure that all tires are the specified size and the same brand.
■ Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe
away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that
may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.
184
2-5. Driving information
■ When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable
to road conditions.
■ When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released.
2
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious
injury.
● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
NOTICE
■ Driving with tire chains
Do not fit tire chains. Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect
driving performance.
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of
the tire pressure warning system.
185
When driving
CAUTION
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also
does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch
carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your Lexus is not designed
for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
186
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.
2
When driving
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
187
2-5. Driving information
188
Interior features
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system ...................................... 190
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers ............................... 198
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types................. 199
Using the radio....................... 202
Using the CD player ............ 209
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs............................. 215
Optimal use of the audio
system ...................................... 221
Using the AUX adapter....... 224
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ...................... 225
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list..................... 227
• Interior lights ........................ 229
• Personal lights...................... 229
3
3-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features.......... 231
• Glove box............................... 231
• Console box ......................... 232
• Overhead console.............. 233
• Cup holders.......................... 234
• Bottle holders/
door pockets ........................ 236
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors ................................. 237
Vanity mirror ........................... 238
Clock......................................... 239
Satellite switches ................... 240
Ashtrays.................................... 243
Cigarette lighter.................... 244
Power outlet ............................ 245
Seat heaters ............................ 246
Armrest .................................... 248
Trunk storage extension ...... 249
Coat hooks ............................... 251
Floor mat .................................. 252
Trunk features......................... 253
Garage door opener ............ 256
Compass .................................. 262
189
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system
Fan speed
Fan speed display
Off
Driver’s side temperature
setting display
Automatic mode
Airflow display
Changes the air outlets used
Passenger’s side temperature
setting display
Micro dust and pollen filter
Passenger’s side
temperature control
Driver's side
temperature control
Windshield defogger
Dual operation button
Air conditioning on/off button
Outside air or recirculated air mode
Using the automatic mode
STEP 1
Press
.
The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan
speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
STEP 2
Press
to switch to automatic mode.
The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air
and recirculated air modes.
190
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
STEP 3
Press “” on
to increase the temperature and “” to
decrease the temperature.
The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set separately.
Adjusting the settings
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “” on
to increase the temperature and “” to decrease
3
the temperature.
Dual mode (the indicator on
is on.): The temperature for the
left-hand seat and right-hand seat can be adjusted separately. Operating the passenger's side temperature control will enter dual mode.
Simultaneous mode (the indicator on
is off.): Only
(driver’s side) can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats.
■ Adjusting the fan speed
Press “” (increase) or “” (decrease) on
Press
.
to turn the fan off.
191
Interior features
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous
modes each time
is pressed.
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Changing the air outlets
Press
.
The air outlets switch each time the
on the display indicates the following.
is pressed. The air flow shown
Upper body
Upper body and feet
Feet
192
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Feet and windshield
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press
.
The mode switches among
(recycles air inside the vehicle), “AUTO”
and
(introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the
is pressed.
Defogging the windshield
Press
.
The air conditioning system operates automatically.
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to
(outside
air) mode when the ambient temperature is low.
193
Interior features
When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates automatically.
3
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Micro dust and pollen filter
Press
.
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the
air flows to the upper part of the
body.
Usually the system will turn off
automatically after approximately
3 minutes.
To stop the operation, press
again.
Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode
STEP 1
Press
onds.
STEP 2
Press “” (increase) or “”
(decrease) on
for 2 or more sec-
.
From -3 (low) to 3 (high) can be
set.
194
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Front outlets (center)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent
Front outlets (right and left side)
3
Rear outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob fully to the outside
of the vehicle to close the vent
195
Interior features
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and
ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.
● The system may switch automatically to recirculated mode when the coolest
temperature setting is selected in summer.
● Immediately after
is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or
cool air is ready to flow.
● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
■ Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an
extended period.
■ Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to
ations where the windows need to be defogged.
(outside air) mode in situ-
■ When outside air temperature approaches 32F (0C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when
■ When the indicator light on
is pressed.
flashes
Press
and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once
more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light
continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
■ Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
■ Micro dust and pollen filter
● In order to prevent the windows from fogging up when the outside air is cold,
the following may occur.
• Outside air mode does not switch to
.
• The air conditioning system operates automatically.
• The operation cancels after 1 minute.
● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press
196
.
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine
is off.
3
Interior features
197
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
On/off
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after approximately 15
minutes.
■ The defogger can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirror, as it can become very hot
and burn you.
198
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system (type A)
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
3
Interior features
Without navigation system (type B: Mark Levinson brand audio system)
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
199
3-2. Using the audio system
Title
Page
Using the radio
P. 202
Using the CD player
P. 209
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
P. 215
Optimal use of the audio system
P. 221
Using the AUX adapter
P. 224
Using the steering wheel audio switches
P. 225
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
CAUTION
■ For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
● Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the
surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain
inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any
of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
200
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
3
Interior features
201
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the radio
Seeking any traffic
program station
Station
selector
Displays radio text messages
Silencing a sound
Adjusting the frequency
(AM, FM mode) or
channel (SAT mode)
Changing the program types
Power Volume
Seeking the
frequency
AMSAT/FM
mode buttons
Scanning for receivable stations
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
STEP 1
Search for desired stations by turning
“” on
STEP 2
or pressing “” or
.
Press and hold the button (from
be set to until you hear a beep.
to
) the station is to
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
■ Scanning the preset radio stations
STEP 1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2
202
When the desired station is reached, press
once again.
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Scanning all radio stations within range
STEP 1 Press
.
All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2
When the desired station is reached, press
once again.
RDS (Radio Data System)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information.
■ Receiving RDS broadcasts
STEP 1
Press “” or “” on
3
during FM reception.
Interior features
The type of program changes each time
is pressed.
● “ROCK”
● “EASYLIS” (Easy listening)
● “CLS/JAZZ” (Classical music and Jazz)
● “R & B” (Rhythm and Blues)
● “INFORM” (Information)
● “RELIGION”
● “MISC” (Miscellaneous)
● “ALERT” (Emergency messages)
If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display.
STEP 2
Press
, or “” or “” on
.
The radio seeks or scans the stations by the relevant program type.
203
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Displaying radio station names
Press
.
■ Displaying radio text messages
Press
twice.
If “MSG” shows in the display, a text message will be displayed.
If the text continues past the end of the display,
hold
until you hear a beep.
is displayed. Press and
XM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
■ Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
STEP 1
STEP 2
Press
.
The display changes as follows each time
“AM”  “SAT1”  “SAT2”  “SAT3”
Turn
is pressed.
to select the desired channel in the all categories or
press “” or “” on
to select the desired channel in the cur-
rent category.
■ Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Press and hold the button
(from
to
) the channel is to be set to until you hear a beep.
■ Changing the channel category
Press “” or “” on
204
.
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
● Scanning channels in the current category
Press
.
STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press
● Scanning preset channels
STEP 1
Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
STEP 2 When the desired channel is reached, press
■ Displaying text information
Press
.
again.
STEP 1
again.
The display will show up to 10 characters.
The display changes as follows each time
3
is pressed.
Interior features
● “CH NAME”
● “TITLE” (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE)
● “NAME” (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE)
● “CH NUMBER”
205
3-2. Using the audio system
■ When the battery is disconnected
Stations presets are erased.
■ Reception sensitivity
● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually
changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio
reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the
antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
■ XM® Satellite Radio
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous
states and 10 Canadian provinces.
● XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A. 
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-877-515-3987.
Canada 
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.
● Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a prob-
lem. Select “CH000” using
, and the receiver's 8-character ID number
will appear.
● Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
206
3-2. Using the audio system
■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
“ANTENNA”
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether
the XM® antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.
You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio.
The radio is being updated with the latest encryption
code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can
choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels.
“NO SIGNAL”
“LOADING”
The premium channel you selected is not authorized.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the
previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM® Satellite
Radio.
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
“OFF AIR”
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.
“-----”
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature
associated with the channel at that time. No action
needed.
207
Interior features
“UPDATING”
3
3-2. Using the audio system
“---”
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait
for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877438-9677 (Canada).
■ Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:
● Reorienting or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
208
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the CD player
Repeat play
Displays text
message
Random playback
Silencing a sound
Power Volume
3
Track selection
Search playback
CD selection
Interior features
CD eject Playback
CD load
Loading CDs
■ Loading a CD
STEP 1 Press
.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
STEP 2
Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to
green.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
■ Loading multiple CDs
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
STEP 2
Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to
green.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.
209
3-2. Using the audio system
STEP 3
Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns from
amber to green again.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To stop the operation, press
.
Ejecting CDs
■ Ejecting a CD
To select the CD to be ejected,
STEP 1
press “” or “” on
.
The number of the CD selected is
shown on the display.
Press
and remove the CD.
■ Ejecting all the CDs
Press and hold
until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs.
STEP 2
Selecting, fast-forwarding, reversing and scanning tracks
■ Selecting a track
Press “” to move up and “” to move down using
until the
desired track number is displayed.
To fast forward or reverse, press and hold “” or “” on
.
■ Scanning a CD
STEP 1 Press
.
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
STEP 2
210
Press
again when the desired track is reached.
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a CD
■ Selecting a CD to play
To select the desired CD, press “” or “” on
■ Scanning loaded CDs
STEP 1 Press and hold
.
until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
STEP 2
Press
again when the desired CD is reached.
Random playback
3
Interior features
■ Current CD
Press
(RAND).
Songs are played in random order until random playback is canceled.
■ All CDs
Press and hold
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in a random order until the button is
pressed once more.
Repeat play
■ To repeat a track
Press
(RPT).
■ To repeat all of the tracks on a CD
Press and hold
(RPT) until you hear a beep.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track no./
Elapsed time  CD title  Track name.
211
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding
for 1 second or
more will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If
is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press
(RAND),
(RPT) or
again.
■ When “LOAD”, “ERROR” or “WAIT” is shown on the display
“LOAD”: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.
“ERROR”: Make sure the label of the displayed disc is facing up, and then reinsert it
in the player.
“WAIT”:
Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait
for a while and then press
. Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD
still cannot be played back.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protection features may not play correctly.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
212
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm).
3
Interior features
● Low-quality and deformed CDs.
● CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area.
213
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off.
■ CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or
the player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
● Do not apply oil to the CD player.
● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
● Do not insert more than one CD at a time.
214
3-2. Using the audio system
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
Folder selection
Repeat play
Random playback
Displays text message
Silencing a sound
File selection
Power Volume
Playback
CD eject Search playback
CD selection
CD load
Interior features
File selection
3
Loading, ejecting and selecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 209
Selecting a folder
■ Selecting folders one at a time
Press
() or
() to select the desired folder.
■ Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder
Press and hold
reached, press
until you hear a beep. When the desired folder is
once again.
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold
() until you hear a beep.
215
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting files
■ Selecting one file at a time
Turn
or press “” or “” on
to select the desired file.
■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Press
.
When the desired file is reached, press
once again.
Repeat play
■ Repeating a file
Press
(RPT).
■ Repeating all of the files in a folder
Press and hold
(RPT) until you hear a beep.
Random playback
■ To play files from a particular folder in random order
Press
(RAND).
■ To play all of the files on a disc in random order
Press and hold
(RAND) until you hear a beep.
Switching the display
Press
.
Each time
is pressed, the display changes in the order of Folder no./
File no./Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title (MP3
only)  Track title  Artist name.
216
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding
for 1 second or
more will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If
is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press
(RAND),
(RPT) or
again.
3
■ When “LOAD”, “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display.
“ERROR”: Make sure the label of the displayed disc is facing up, and then reinsert it
in the player.
“WAIT”:
Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait
for a while and then press
. Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD
still cannot be played back.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
217
Interior features
“LOAD”: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
■ MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media TM Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not
finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is
scratched or marked with fingerprints.
218
3-2. Using the audio system
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
219
3
Interior features
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
3-2. Using the audio system
● MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
● Playback
• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding
and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may
result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be
possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
P. 213
■ CD player precautions
P. 214
220
3-2. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Type A
Adjusting the sound quality
Adjusting the ASL
Changing the listening position
Changing the sound quality modes
3
Interior features
Type B
Adjusting the sound quality
Adjusting the ASL
Changing the sound quality modes
221
3-2. Using the audio system
Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
Press
.
The ASL switches between on and off modes each time
pressed.
is
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise
level as you drive your vehicle.
Changing the listening position (type A only)
The sound feel setting can be changed to produce the best sound for
each listening position.
Press
(position selector) to change the setting.
The display changes as follows each time
Display
is pressed.
Listening position
“DRIVER”
Position best suited to the driver’s seat
“FRONT”
Position best suited to the driver’s and front passenger
seats
“REAR”
Position best suited to the rear seats
“ALL”
Position best suited to all seats
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
■ Changing sound quality modes
Press
Pressing
.
changes the sound mode in the following order.
“BAS”“MID”“TRE”“FAD”“BAL”“SURROUND”*
*: Type B only
222
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Adjusting sound quality
Press
or
to adjust the level.
Mode
displayed
Sound quality mode
Level
“BAS”*1
Bass
-5 to 5
“MID”*1
Mid-range
-5 to 5
“TRE”*1
Treble
-5 to 5
“FAD”
Front/rear
volume
balance
F7 to R7
“BAL”
Left/right
volume
balance
L7 to R7
Shifts to left
Shifts to right
“SURROUND”*2
Surround
On/off
Off
On
Press 
Press 
Low
High
Shifts to rear
Shifts to front
3
■ Surround sound system (type B only)
When the surround mode is on, the matrix 7.1 surround sound system provides a
realistic sound field.
223
Interior features
*1: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio or CD mode.
*2:Type B only
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX adapter
This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it
through the vehicle’s speakers.
STEP 1
Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.
STEP 2
Press
.
■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio
device.
224
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering
wheel.
Turns the power on, select
audio source
Volume
Radio: Select radio stations
CD: Select tracks, files (MP3
and WMA) and discs
3
Turning on the power
when the audio system is turned off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding
more.
down for 1 second or
Changing the audio source
Press
when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes as follows each time
is pressed. If no discs are inserted in
the player, that mode will be skipped.
FM1FM2CD changerAUXAMSAT1SAT2SAT3
Adjusting the volume
Press “+” on
ume.
Hold down
to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the volto continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
225
Interior features
Press
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a radio station
STEP 1
Press
to select the radio mode.
STEP 2
Press “”or “” on
to select a radio station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold
beep.
until you hear a
Selecting a track/file
STEP 1
Press
to select the CD mode.
STEP 2
Press “” or “” on
to select the desired track/file.
Selecting a disc in the CD changer
STEP 1
Press
to select the CD mode.
STEP 2
Press and hold “” or “” on
until a beep is heard.
■ Canceling automatic selection of a radio station
Push the same switch.
CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
226
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Your Lexus is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in entering the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in the
following illustration automatically turn on/off according to the presence of
the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the
doors are opened/closed, and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode.
3
Interior features
Front personal lights (P. 229)
Shift lever light (when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode)
Front overhead courtesy light
Front interior light (P. 229)
Rear personal lights (P. 229)
Rear overhead courtesy light
Rear interior light
Front door courtesy lights
227
3-3. Using the interior lights
Front foot well lights
Outer foot lights
Turning the instrument panel light control knob fully to the left disables the
shift lever light and front foot well lights.
■ To prevent battery discharge
If the overhead courtesy lights and interior lights remain on when the door is not
fully closed and the interior light switch (door position on/off) is on, the lights will go
off automatically after 20 minutes.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 428)
228
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights and personal lights
Interior lights
Models without a moon roof
Door position on/off
On/off
Models with a moon roof
3
Interior features
Door position on/off
On/off
Personal lights
Front (models without a moon roof)
On/off
229
3-3. Using the interior lights
Personal lights
Front (models with a moon roof)
On/off
Rear
On/off
230
3-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features
Glove box
3
Interior features
Overhead console
Glove box
Bottle holders/door pockets
Cup holders
Console box/cup holder
Glove box
Open (push button)
Lock with the mechanical key
Unlock with the mechanical key
231
3-4. Using the storage features
Glove box and console box
■ Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Trunk opener main switch
The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. ( P. 41)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Console box
Pull up the knob to release the
lock.
Slide the armrest.
Pull up the knob to release the
lock.
Lift the armrest to open.
232
3-4. Using the storage features
Console box and overhead console
■ Console box light
The console box light turns on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode.
■ Using the console box to store CD cases
Store a CD case with the hinged portion facing either the front or back of the console
box.
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Overhead console
Press the overhead console.
The overhead console is useful for
temporarily storing sunglasses and
similar small items.
233
3-4. Using the storage features
Overhead console and cup holders
CAUTION
■ Items that should not be left in the overhead console
Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console.
If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses may
warp or become cracked.
■ Caution while driving
Do not leave the overhead console open while driving.
Items may fall out and cause death or serious injury in case of an accident or sudden
stop.
Cup holders
Front (press-in type)
Press down and release the front
of the cup holder lid.
Front (slide type)
Pull up the knob to release the
lock.
Slide the armrest.
234
3-4. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Rear
Press in and release the cup holders on the rear center armrest.
■ Using the front cup holder (slide type) to store small items
Remove the cup holder insert holding the
base part.
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■ When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
235
3-4. Using the storage features
Bottle holders/door pockets
Bottle holders/door pockets
The door pockets can be opened
and closed.
When installing the bottle, close
the cap of the bottle.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the door pockets closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
236
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors
Forward position:
Flip down.
Side position:
Flip down, unhook, and swing
to the side.
3
Interior features
237
3-5. Other interior features
Vanity mirror
Slide the cover.
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.
238
3-5. Other interior features
Clock
Adjusts the hour.
Adjusts the minutes.
Rounds to the nearest hour.*
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29  1:00
1:30 to 1:59  2:00
■ The clock is displayed when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
3
Interior features
239
3-5. Other interior features
Satellite switches
The satellite switches can be used to change the settings of various features. Settings are shown on the multi-information display.
■ Operating the satellite switches
STEP 1
Bring up the satellite switch
mode on the multi-information
display.
Press “”, “” or the “ON/OFF”
button.
STEP 2
Select the item whose setting is
to be changed.
Press “” or “” to display the
item whose setting is to be
changed.
240
3-5. Other interior features
STEP 3
Change the settings.
Press the “ON/OFF” button to
change the settings (e.g. on/off).
■ Items that can be set using the satellite switches
Intuitive parking assist (P. 163) on/off (if
equipped)
3
Interior features
Tire pressure warning system initialization
(P. 301)
ID code selection for tire pressure warning system
(P. 303)
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (P. 143)
on/off
241
3-5. Other interior features
■ Changing the settings
Each item is displayed and its setting can be changed only in the following conditions:
● Intuitive parking assist: When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNI-
TION ON mode.
● Items other than the above: When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
IGNITION ON mode and the vehicle is stopped.
■ Display
The display will return to the original display if the satellite switches are not operated for an extended period.
Even if the display is in satellite switch mode, it will switch in the event of a warning
or when the radar cruise control is used. If this occurs, press any of the satellite
switches or “DISP” switch on the steering wheel to return the display to satellite
switch mode.
242
3-5. Other interior features
Ashtrays
Front
Push the back part of the lid to
open. Push the lid again to close.
Push the lever to remove the
ashtray.
Rear
Pull the ashtray lid to open.
3
CAUTION
■ When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■ To prevent fire
● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then
make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
243
Interior features
Hold the plate down and pull the
ashtray upwards to remove.
3-5. Other interior features
Cigarette lighter
Push the back part of the lid to
open, and push the cigarette
lighter down.
The cigarette lighter will pop up
when it is ready for use.
■ The cigarette lighter can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■ When not in use
Keep the lid closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■ To avoid burns or fires
● Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
● Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
● Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.
244
3-5. Other interior features
Power outlet
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less than 10
A.
3
■ The power outlet can be used when
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
245
Interior features
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
3-5. Other interior features
Seat heaters
Driver’s seat
Front passenger’s
seat
Heats the seats
The indicator light comes on.
The higher the number, the
warmer the seats become.
■ The seat heaters can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ When not in use
Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off.
246
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ Burns
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on
to avoid the possibility of burns:
•
•
•
•
Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the
seat and may lead to overheating.
■ To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects
(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.
247
Interior features
NOTICE
3
3-5. Other interior features
Armrest
Pull the armrest down for use.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
248
3-5. Other interior features
Trunk storage extension
Long objects can be loaded in the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space and
rear seat area.
STEP 1
Pull down the armrest.
STEP 2
Lift up the trunk door cover.
3
Interior features
STEP 3
Open the inside trunk door
from the trunk and load baggage or other items.
249
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ When not in use
Ensure that the inside trunk door is closed.
In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown forward into
the cabin, resulting in injury.
250
3-5. Other interior features
Coat hooks
To use the coat hook, push it in.
CAUTION
3
■ Items that must not be hung on the hook
251
Interior features
Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that cause death
or serious injury.
3-5. Other interior features
Floor mat
Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet.
Secure the driver’s floor mat
using the hooks provided.
CAUTION
■ When inserting the floor mat
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the movement of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident.
● Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the correct
side faces upward.
● Do not place floor mats on top of existing mats.
252
3-5. Other interior features
Trunk features
■ Cargo hooks
Cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
■ Shopping bag hooks
3
Interior features
■ First-aid kit storage belt
Loosen
Tighten
253
3-5. Other interior features
■ Warning triangle storage belt
Loosen
Tighten
■ Luggage mat
Pull the lever upwards when lifting the luggage mat up.
The lever can be hooked on the
edge of the trunk.
254
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ When the cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in
use.
NOTICE
■ When closing the trunk
Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk.
The luggage mat may get damaged.
3
Interior features
255
3-5. Other interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems,
and other devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink.
Programming the HomeLink (for U.S.A. owners)
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Indicator
Buttons
■ Programming the HomeLink
STEP 1
Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to
75 mm) from the HomeLink buttons.
Keep the HomeLink indicator
light in view while programming.
256
3-5. Other interior features
STEP 2
Press and hold one of the
HomeLink buttons and the transmitter button. When the
HomeLink
indicator
light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both buttons.
If the HomeLink indicator light
comes on but does not flash,
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds
and remains lit, the HomeLink
button is already programmed.
Use the other buttons or follow
the
“Reprogramming
a
HomeLink button” instructions. (P. 259)
Test the HomeLink operation by
pressing the newly programmed
button.
If a HomeLink button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
remote control transmitter is of the
rolling code type. Press and hold
the programmed HomeLink button. The remote control transmitter
is of the rolling code type if the
HomeLink indicator light flashes
rapidly for 2 seconds and then
remains lit. If your transmitter is of
the rolling code type, proceed to
the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
STEP 4
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
257
Interior features
STEP 3
3
3-5. Other interior features
■ Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)
If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
STEP 1
Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
motor for the location of the training button.
STEP 2
Press the training button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3
below.
STEP 3
Press and hold the vehicle's programmed HomeLink button for
2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage
door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the
door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by opening
the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize
the HomeLink signal and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system
for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all
devices in the Canadian market
STEP 1 Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
STEP 4
Keep the HomeLink indicator light in view while programming.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
258
Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control
button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete.
When the indicator light on the HomeLink compatible transceiver starts to flash rapidly, release the buttons.
3-5. Other interior features
Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.
STEP 6 Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■ Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door
locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.
STEP 5
■ Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a
HomeLink button” instructions.
Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator
light should come on.
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a
signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.
Reprogramming a HomeLink button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink indicator light will start flashing slowly. Next, while still pressing and holding the HomeLink button, press and hold the button on the
transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a
rapid flash.
259
Interior features
Operating the HomeLink
3
3-5. Other interior features
Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink memory.
■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
● The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from
the HomeLinkbutton.
■ Certification for the garage door opener
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the IC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
260
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door on other devices may operate, so ensure people and objects are
out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
3
Interior features
261
3-5. Other interior features
Compass
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which
the vehicle is heading.
■ Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
push and hold “AUTO” for 3
seconds.
■ Displays and directions
262
Display
Direction
N
North
NE
Northeast
E
East
SE
Southeast
S
South
SW
Southwest
W
West
NW
Northwest
3-5. Other interior features
Calibrating the compass
3
If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
■ Deviation calibration
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Push and hold “AUTO” for 6 secSTEP 2
onds.
A number (1 to 15) appears on the
compass display.
STEP 3
Press “AUTO”, and referring to the map above, select the number
of the zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the calibration is complete.
263
Interior features
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the
earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
3-5. Other interior features
■ Circling calibration
If CAL appears on the display,
drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/
h) or less in a circle until a direction
is displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until the direction is displayed.
■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interfer-
ence by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a
steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection,
near a large vehicle, etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
● The battery has been disconnected.
● A door is open.
264
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
■ When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■ To avoid the compass malfunctions
3
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's
magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows,
etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
265
Interior features
■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
3-5. Other interior features
266
Maintenance and care
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior............. 268
Do-it-yourself service
precautions........................... 280
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior............... 271
Hood.......................................... 283
Positioning a floor jack ......... 284
Engine compartment ........... 286
4-2. Maintenance
Tires............................................ 300
Maintenance
requirements ......................... 274
Tire inflation pressure............. 311
General maintenance ........... 276
Air conditioning filter ............ 317
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs................................. 279
Electronic key battery.......... 320
Wheels....................................... 315
Checking and replacing
fuses ........................................ 322
Headlight aim ......................... 336
Light bulbs................................ 338
267
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
● Turn the wipers off before washing the vehicle.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the
windows.
● Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed prop-
erly.
■ Aluminum wheels
Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes
or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same
mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
268
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■ To prevent deterioration and body corrosion
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
•
•
•
•
•
After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint
After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
CAUTION
4
■ Exhaust pipes and rear bumper exhaust diffusers
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the exhaust pipes and rear
bumper exhaust diffusers until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust
pipes and diffusers can cause burns.
269
Maintenance and care
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes and rear bumper exhaust diffusers to
become quite hot. Therefore, do not touch them while the engine is running or
immediately after turning the engine off.
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces
Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms
When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield pull the driver side wiper arm
upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to their
original position, do so from the passenger side first.
■ When using an automatic car wash
Off
270
Set the wiper switch to the off position.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers
may operate and the wiper blades may be
damaged.
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep
it in top condition:
■ Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■ Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool
detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe
off all remaining traces of detergent.
4
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
Maintenance and care
■ Synthetic leather areas
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge
or soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt
and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
271
4-1. Maintenance and care
■ Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or
brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. The excellent results are obtained when keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 78)
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly,
resulting in death or serious injury.
272
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the vehicle interior or
cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces.
● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park
the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as
they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■ Water on the floor
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to
the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with
lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes
running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
273
4
Maintenance and care
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also
cause the body to rust.
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular
checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance.
■ General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This
can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.
■ Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the
“Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/
Scheduled Maintenance”.
■ Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Guide”,
“Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or
“Warranty Booklet”.
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair
shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
274
4-2. Maintenance
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all
systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been
performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your
vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
CAUTION
■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained
It could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
■ Warning in handling of battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-
ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 296)
275
4
Maintenance and care
nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash
any affected area immediately.
4-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed
at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Services Guide” or “Owners
Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service
shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items
276
Check points
Battery
Maintenance-free.
(P. 296)
Brake fluid
At the correct level? (P. 294)
Engine coolant
At the correct level? (P. 292)
Engine oil
At the correct level? (P. 288)
Exhaust system
No fumes or strange sounds?
Radiator/condenser/hoses
Not blocked with foreign matter?
(P. 294)
Washer fluid
At the correct level? (P. 299)
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items
Check points
Accelerator pedal
• Moves smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching)?
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
• Can the vehicle be held securely
on an incline with the shift lever in
P?
Brake pedal
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clearance
and correct amount of free play?
Brakes
• Not pull to one side when applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
• Move smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers
• Function properly?
Lights
• Do all the lights come on?
• Headlights aimed correctly?
(P. 336)
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
Seat belts
• Does the seat belt system operate
smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
Seats
• Do the seat controls operate properly?
Maintenance and care
Head restraints
4
277
4-2. Maintenance
Items
Steering wheel
Check points
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
Vehicle exterior
Items
Check points
Door/trunk
• Operate smoothly?
Engine hood
• The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks
• Is there any leakage after parking?
Tire
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
■ If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing
maintenance checks.
278
4-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in
the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test
and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service
the vehicle.
■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
4
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
279
Maintenance and care
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.
Items
Battery condition
Brake fluid level
Engine coolant level
280
Parts and tools
(P. 296)
• Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
(P. 294)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake
fluid)
(P. 292)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine,
non-nitrite and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items
Parts and tools
Engine oil level
(P. 288)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel, funnel (used
only for adding engine oil)
Fuses
(P. 322)
• Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
Headlight aim
(P. 336)
• Phillips-head screwdriver
Radiator and condenser (P. 294)
Tire inflation pressure
Washer fluid
(P. 311)
(P. 299)

• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
• Water washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel
4
Maintenance and care
281
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury,
observe the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine compartment:
● Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driv-
ing as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine
compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel
and battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and
corrosive sulfuric acid.
■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille:
Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is OFF.
With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric
cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the
coolant temperature is high. (P. 294)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting
in the eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to
dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
282
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
STEP 1
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
4
Lift the auxiliary catch lever and
lift the hood.
CAUTION
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
283
Maintenance and care
STEP 2
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
■ Front
Jack point
Oil pan*
*: Take care when positioning a floor jack, as it is easy to mistake the
engine oil pan for the jack point.
■ Rear
Jack point
284
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When raising your vehicle:
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious
injury.
● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as
the one shown in the illustration.
● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
● Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by
the floor jack.
Always use automotive jack stands on a solid, level surface.
4
● Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
● Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift
● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the
floor jack.
285
Maintenance and care
lever in P.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
Battery
(P. 296)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 288)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 288)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 294)
Fuse boxes
(P. 322)
286
Washer fluid tank
(P. 299)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser
(P. 294)
Radiator
(P. 294)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 292)
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment cover
■ Removing the engine compartment cover
Front
Outside
*
4
■ Installing the clips and nut
*
Press the tip of the clip against a
hard surface, such as a desk, to
allow the center part of the clip
to be pushed up.
Insert
*: Push it down as far as it will go.
Press
287
Maintenance and care
*: Using a tool, turn the nut until the engine compartment cover can be
removed.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait
more than five minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and pull
STEP 2
the dipstick out.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
288
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the
oil level.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the
engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Oil grade
Items
STEP 1
STEP 2
Clean funnel
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
4
It takes about 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp.qt.) to raise the oil level from low to full on the
dipstick.
■ Recommended viscosity
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for
good fuel economy, and good
starting in cold weather.
Outside temperature
*: If SAE 5W-30 oil is not available, SAE 10W-30 oil may be
used. However, it should be
replaced with SAE 5W-30 at
the next oil change.
289
Maintenance and care
STEP 3
ILSAC multi-grade engine oil
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ How to read oil container labels
Some oil containers are labeled with ILSAC certification marks that
help you to select the proper oil.
■ Engine oil consumption
● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of
the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and fre-
quent acceleration and deceleration.
● A new engine consumes more oil.
● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may
have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp.qt./600 miles (1.0 L per 1000
km)
● If your vehicle consumes more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 lmp.qt.) every 600 miles
(1000 km), contact your Lexus dealer.
■ After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
The oil change system should be reset. Perform the following procedures:
STEP 1 Switch the display to the odometer (P. 131) when the engine is running.
STEP 2 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 3 While pressing the trip meter reset button, set the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to the IGNITION ON mode (but do not start the engine
because otherwise the reset mode will be cancelled). Continue to press
and hold the button until the trip meter displays “000000”.
290
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin
disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid
prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-
pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on regular basis.
4
■ When replacing the engine oil
Maintenance and care
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
291
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL”
“LOW”
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line.
292
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, coolant reservoir cap, drain cock and water
pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in
the cooling system.
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high-quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%
deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water. (Enabled: -44F [-42C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
4
CAUTION
Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing burns or other injuries.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water
and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.
293
Maintenance and care
■ When the engine is hot
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser, and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their
condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser, as they may be hot and you may be burned.
Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
294
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Fluid type
Items
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Clean funnel
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use
only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water
immediately.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
295
Maintenance and care
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
■ Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there
are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
Ground cable
■ Checking battery condition
Check the battery condition using the indicator color.
Blue: Good condition
Red: Not working properly.
Have the battery checked by
your Lexus dealer.
White: Charging is necessary.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
296
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the
ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon-
necting the charger cables to the battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery
In some cases, the engine may not start. Follow the procedure bellow to initialize
the system.
STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to “P”, and turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF.
STEP 2 Open and close any of the doors.
STEP 3 Start the engine. (If the engine does not start first time, repeat the proce-
dure.)
If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts at the above method, contact
your Lexus dealer.
■ Chemicals in the battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious
injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
297
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Where to safety charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or
closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a
quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw
egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
298
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
CAUTION
■ When refilling washer fluid
Do not refill washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
4
NOTICE
Maintenance and care
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.
299
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and tread wear.
■ Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or
“ ” marks, etc., molded on the
sidewall of each tire.
■ The tire pressure warning system
Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 358, 367)
Installing tire inflation pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,
new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning
system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 303)
300
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized when the tire
inflation pressure is changed (such as when changing traveling
speed.)
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
To initialize the system, use the satellite switch. (P. 240)
STEP 1
Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to OFF.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
STEP 2
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (P. 411)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on
this pressure level.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
301
Maintenance and care
STEP 3
4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 4
The tire inflation pressure initialization setting display
Continue to press “” or “” until
the initialization setting display
appears.
It may take several minutes to complete the setting. Wait for several
minutes before turning the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to
OFF if necessary.
Recording tire inflation pressure
settings
Press and hold the “ON/OFF” button until the tire pressure warning
light blinks slowly 3 times and the
message “PRESSURE INITIAL”
showing that the initial setting is
complete is displayed on the multiinformation display.
STEP 5
302
Wait for a few minutes with the IGNITION ON mode, and then
turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Registering and selecting ID codes
To select tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes, use the
satellite switch. (P. 240)
■ Registering ID codes
2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be
registered. Once a second set of tires is registered at “2ND”, you can
switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the “ON/OFF” button.
There are 2 settings:
“MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter on the tires originally installed on the
vehicle is registered.
303
4
Maintenance and care
“2ND” position: The ID code is not registered. When you replace a
new set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters from your Lexus dealer and
have the new ID code registered by your Lexus
dealer.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Selecting ID codes
When replacing tires, make sure to select the ID code set that matches
the new tire set. If the ID code is set to the wrong tire setting, the tire
pressure warning system will not operate properly. After driving for
about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
Tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter ID code settings display
Press “” or “” repeatedly until
the setting display appears.
Switching ID codes
Press the “ON/OFF” button to
switch between “MAIN” and
“2ND” ID codes.
304
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the
fabric or bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered,
the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20
minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they
have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
4
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
It is not possible to rotate the tires, as each tire and wheel is designed only for its
original position on the vehicle.
■ Tire replacement
P. 316
■ Low profile tires
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be
reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to
use snow tires on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate
for road and weather conditions.
305
Maintenance and care
■ Tire rotation
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross
Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is
greater.
As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle Weight
Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label. (P. 311, 416).
■ Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered
or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires
is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with
snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration
and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3 Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original
equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install
studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction.
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 184)
306
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.
■ If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level
and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases,
the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warn-
ing light does not flash 3 times and the setting message does not appear on the
multi-information display.
● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light
blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
307
4
Maintenance and care
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
MODEL/FCC IDs:
Transmitter: PAXPMV107J
Receiver: HYQ13BCE
IC (Canada) IDs:
Transmitter: 3729A-PMV107J
Receiver: 1551A-13BCE
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
308
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause
damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics,
which may lead to fatal or injury accidents.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
● Do not mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-ply tires.
● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not press the satellite switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to
the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on
even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation
pressure is actually normal.
4
NOTICE
mitters
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
309
Maintenance and care
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning valves and trans-
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the
tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ Low profile tires
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when
receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to the following:
● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may
be damaged more severely.
● Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards.
Failure to do so can lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
310
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
■ Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 411)
4
Maintenance and care
311
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and
adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
.
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
312
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for
more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure
reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures
that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
4
● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
313
Maintenance and care
tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur
and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Poor sealing of the tire bead
● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as
soon as possible.
314
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling
control.
■ Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they
are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim
width, and offset.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
Lexus does not recommend using:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
■ Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
4
Maintenance and care
● When repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts
are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a
plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in
the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 301)
315
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Tire and wheel replacement
Each tire and wheel is designed only for its
original position on the vehicle.
Therefore, when replacing tires and wheels
make sure that they are fitted in the position
indicated on the reverse side of the wheel.
“FR”: Front right-hand side
“FL”: Front left-hand side
“RR”: Rear right-hand side
“RL”: Rear left-hand side
CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire inflation pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other
qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
● Ensure that only Genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels.
316
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
■ Removal method
STEP 1 Set the air conditioning system to recirculated mode.
The air conditioning filter case cannot be removed with the system in
the outside air mode.
STEP 2
STEP 3
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF.
Open the glove box. Lift and
remove the partition.
4
Remove the filter cover.
STEP 5
Remove the filter case.
Maintenance and care
STEP 4
317
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Cleaning method
If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing compressed air through the
filter from the downward side.
Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm)
from the filter and blow for
approximately 2 minutes at
72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm2
or bar).
If it is not available, have the
filter cleaned by your Lexus
dealer.
■ Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and
replace it with a new one.
The “UP” marks shown on the
filter and the filter case should
be pointing up.
■ Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Warranty
and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
318
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the system
● When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.
● When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.
4
Maintenance and care
319
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■ You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small Phillips-head screwdriver
● Lithium battery (CR1632)
■ Replacing the battery
STEP 1
Take out the mechanical key.
STEP 2
Remove the cover.
STEP 3
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
320
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ If the electronic key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will
not function properly.
● The operational range is reduced.
■ Use a CR1632 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
■ When the card key battery needs to be replaced (Canada only)
The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer
can replace the battery for you.
CAUTION
4
■ Removed battery and other parts
Maintenance and care
Keep away from children.
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
321
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.
If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF.
STEP 2 Engine compartment (type B): Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 287)
STEP 3 Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment (type A)
Push the tabs in and lift the lid
off.
STEP 1
Engine compartment (type B)
Push the tabs in and lift the lid
off.
322
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Driver's side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
Passenger's side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
4
STEP 5
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings”
(P. 326) for details about which fuse to check.
Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.
323
Maintenance and care
STEP 4
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
STEP 6
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
324
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
Removing the front controller (engine compartment: type B)
Lift the lid off while pushing the
tabs on either side.
4
Maintenance and care
325
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■ Engine compartment (type A)
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
1
ABS 3
25 A
VDIM
2
ALT-S
7.5 A
Charging system
3
TURN-HAZ
15 A
Emergency flashers, turn signals
4
IG2 MAIN
20 A
IG2, IGN, GAUGE
5
RAD NO. 2
30 A
Audio system
6
D/C CUT
20 A
DOME, MPX-B
7
RAD NO. 1
30 A
Audio system
8
MPX-B
10 A
Headlights, front fog lights, parking
lights, license plate lights, windshield
washer, horns, power door lock system, power windows, power seats,
electric tilt and telescopic steering
column, meters and gauges, smart
access system with push-button start,
outside rear view mirrors, air conditioning system
9
DOME
10 A
Interior lights, meters and gauges
10
CDS
10 A
Electric cooling fans
326
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
11
E/G-B
60 A
FR CTRL-B, ETCS, A/F, STR LOCK,
INJ2
12
P/I-B
60 A
EFI, F/PMP, INJ
13
ABS 1
50 A
VDIM
14
RH J/B-B
30 A
FR DOOR RH, RR DOOR RH, AM2
15
VVT
40 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
16
MAIN
30 A
H-LP R LWR, H-LP L LWR, headlight
low beams
17
STARTER
30 A
Smart access system with push-button
start
18
LH J/B-B
30 A
FR DOOR LH, RR DOOR LH,
SECURITY
19
EPS
80 A
Electric power steering
20
ALT
180 A
LH J/B-AM, E/G-AM, HEATER,
FAN1, FAN2, DEFOG, RH J/B-AM
80 A
S/ROOF, FR P/SEAT LH, TV NO.1,
A/C, FUEL OPEN, PSB, FR WIP,
H-LP LVL, LH-IG, ECU-IG LH,
PANEL, TAIL, MIR HTR, TV NO. 2,
FR S/HTR LH
LH J/B-AM
22
RH J/B-AM
80 A
OBD, STOP SW, TI&TE, FR P/SEAT
RH, RAD NO. 3, ECU-IG RH,
RH-IG, FR S/HTR RH, ACC, CIG,
PWR OUTLET
23
DEFOG
50 A
Rear window defogger
24
FAN2
40 A
Electric cooling fans
Maintenance and care
21
4
327
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
25
FAN1
40 A
Electric cooling fans
26
HEATER
50 A
CDS, air conditioning system
27
E/G-AM
60 A
H-LP CLN, FR CTRL-AM
328
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Engine compartment (type B)
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
1
SPARE
30 A
Spare fuse
2
SPARE
25 A
Spare fuse
3
SPARE
10 A
Spare fuse
4
FR CTRL-B
25 A
HORN, headlight high beams
5
A/F
15 A
Exhaust system
6
ETCS
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
4
INJ2
25 A
8
STR LOCK
25 A
Steering lock system
9
H-LP CLN
30 A
Headlight cleaner
10
DEICER
25 A
11
FR CTRL-AM
30 A
FR FOG, WASHER, FR TAIL
12
IG2
10 A
Ignition system
329
Maintenance and care
7
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
13
EFI NO. 2
10 A
Fuel system, exhaust system, multiport
fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
14
H-LP R LWR
15 A
Headlight low beam (right)
15
H-LP L LWR
15 A
Headlight low beam (left)
16
F/PMP
25 A
Fuel system
17
EFI
25 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
18
INJ
25 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection system
19
H-LP UPR
15 A
Headlight beams
20
HORN
10 A
Horns
21
WASHER
20 A
Windshield washer
22
FR TAIL
10 A
Parking lights, side marker lights
23
FR FOG
15 A
Front fog lights
330
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Driver’s side instrument panel
Ampere
Circuit
1
FR P/SEAT LH
30 A
Power seat
2
A/C
7.5 A
Air conditioning system
3
MIR HTR
15 A
Outside rear view mirror defoggers
4
TV NO. 1
10 A
Display
5
FUEL OPEN
10 A
Fuel filler door opener
6
TV NO. 2
7.5 A
7
PSB
30 A
Pre-collision seat belt
8
S/ROOF
25 A
Moon roof
9
TAIL
10 A
Tail lights, license plate lights, parking
lights, rear side marker lights
10
PANEL
7.5 A
Switch illumination, air conditioning
system, display
11
RR FOG
7.5 A
4
Maintenance and care
Fuse
12
ECU-IG LH
10 A
Cruise control, air conditioning system, electric power steering, shift lock
system, moon roof, tire inflation pressure warning system
13
FR S/HTR LH
15 A
Seat heaters and ventilators
331
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
14
RR DOOR LH
20 A
Power windows
15
FR DOOR LH
20 A
Power windows, outside rear view
mirror (left)
16
SECURITY
7.5 A
Smart access system with push-button
start
17
H-LP LVL
7.5 A
AFS
18
LH-IG
10 A
Charging system, headlight cleaner,
rear window defogger, electric cooling fans, emergency flashers, turn signal lights, back-up lights, stop lights,
outside rear view mirror defoggers,
seat belts, intuitive parking assist, air
conditioning system
19
FR WIP
30 A
Windshield wipers
332
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Passenger’s side instrument panel
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
1
FR P/SEAT RH
30 A
Power seat
2
DOOR DL
15 A
3
OBD
7.5 A
On-board diagnosis system
4
STOP SW
7.5 A
Stop lights, VDIM
4
TI & TE
20 A
6
RAD NO. 3
10 A
Audio system
7
GAUGE
7.5 A
Meters and gauges
8
IGN
10 A
SRS airbag system, stop lights, steering lock system, fuel system, front passenger occupant classification system
9
ACC
7.5 A
Clock, air conditioning system, audio
system, navigation system, display,
outside rear view mirrors, smart
access system with push-button start,
glove box light, console box light
10
CIG
15 A
Cigarette lighter
11
PWR OUTLET
15 A
Power outlet
12
RR DOOR RH
20 A
Power windows
333
Maintenance and care
5
Electric tilt and telescopic steering
column
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
13
FR DOOR RH
20 A
Power windows, outside rear view
mirrors
14
AM2
7.5 A
Smart access system with push-button
start
15
RH-IG
7.5 A
Seat belts, intuitive parking assist,
automatic transmission, seat heaters
and ventilators
16
FR S/HTR RH
15 A
Seat heaters and ventilators
10 A
Power seats, smart access system with
push-button start, outside rear view
mirrors, VDIM, air conditioning system, pre-collision seat belt, electric tilt
and telescopic steering, power windows, navigation system
17
ECU-IG RH
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (P. 338)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
■ If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.
334
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other
object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
● Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer.
4
Maintenance and care
335
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Headlight aim
■ Removing the engine compartment cover.
P. 287
■ Vertical movement adjusting bolts
Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B
■ Before checking the headlight aim
STEP 1 Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around
the headlight is not deformed.
STEP 2 Park the vehicle on level ground.
STEP 3 Sit in the driver’s seat.
STEP 4 Bounce the vehicle several times.
■ Adjusting the headlight aim
Turn bolt A in either direction
STEP 1
using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
Remember the turning direction
and the number of turns in mind.
336
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 2
Turn bolt B the same number of
turns and in the same direction
as step 1 using a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
If the error is over the value
specified above, take the vehicle
to your Lexus dealer to adjust
the headlight aim.
4
Maintenance and care
337
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information about
replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Preparing a replacement light bulb
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 412)
■ Bulb locations
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light
Replacing light bulbs
■ Back-up lights
STEP 1
338
Open the trunk door and remove
the cover clips.
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 2
STEP 3
Partly remove the cover. Remove
the wire harness and turn the bulb
base counterclockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
4
■ Rear turn signal lights
Open the trunk door and remove
the cover.
STEP 2
Remove the connector and turn
the bulb base counterclockwise.
339
Maintenance and care
STEP 1
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
■ Bulbs other than the above
If any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have your Lexus dealer
replace it.
● Headlight low and high beams (discharge bulbs)
● Headlight high beams
● Front fog lights
● Parking lights
● Front turn signal lights
● Front side marker lights
● Stop/tail lights
● Tail lights
● Rear side marker lights
● High mounted stoplight
● License plate lights
340
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction.
● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
■ Discharge headlights
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may
go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is
restored.
■ LED tail lights, stop/tail lights and high mounted stoplight
The tail lights, stop/tail lights and high mounted stoplight consist of a number of
LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the
light replaced.
4
Maintenance and care
341
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning
off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by
the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may
result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage
the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam headlight bulbs, connectors,
power supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.
■ Discharge headlights
● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing discharge headlights (including light
bulbs).
● Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when
the headlights are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result in
serious injury or death by electric shock.
■ To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
342
When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers............... 344
If your vehicle needs to
be towed................................. 345
If you think something
is wrong ................................... 351
5
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds... ................................. 355
Fuel pump shut off system.... 352
If a warning message is
displayed................................ 365
Event data recorder .............. 353
If you have a flat tire............... 379
If the engine will not start .... 388
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ....................... 389
If you lose your keys .............. 390
If the electronic key does
not operate properly........... 391
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ............................ 394
If your vehicle overheats ..... 397
If the vehicle becomes
stuck........................................ 400
343
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in an
accident.
Press the switch to flash all the
turn signal lights. To turn them
off, press the switch once again.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
344
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat
bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial
and local laws.
If towing from the rear, the vehicle’s front wheels and axles must be in good
condition. (P. 349)
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Lexus dealer before towing.
● The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Emergency towing
Towing eyelet
345
5
When trouble arises
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing
eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short
distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
5-1. Essential information
■ Emergency towing procedure
STEP 1 Release the parking brake.
STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to N.
STEP 3 Put the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY mode (engine
off) or IGNITION ON mode (engine running).
CAUTION
■ Caution while towing
● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on
the emergency towing eyelet and the cables or chains.
● If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not
function, making steering and braking more difficult.
NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
346
5-1. Essential information
Installing the towing eyelet
STEP 1
Remove the eyelet cover using a
flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a
rag between the screwdriver and
the vehicle body, as shown in the
illustration.
STEP 2
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by hand.
STEP 3
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut wrench.
5
When trouble arises
■ Location of the emergency towing eyelet
P. 379
347
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
■ Installing the towing eyelet to the vehicle
Make sure that the towing eyelet is installed securely.
If not securely installed, the towing eyelet may come loose during towing. This may
lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
Towing with a sling-type truck
NOTICE
■ To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling- type truck, either from the front or rear.
348
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a wheel lift-type truck
From the front
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
From the rear
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to the ACCESSORY mode
so that the steering wheel is
unlocked.
5
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
■ To prevent damaging the vehicle
● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel
straight.
● When raising the vehicle from the rear, ensure adequate ground clearance for
towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed from the rear.
349
When trouble arises
NOTICE
5-1. Essential information
Using a flat bed truck
If your Lexus is transported by a
flat bed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs
or the vehicle may be damaged.
350
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
■ Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■ Operational symptoms
● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
● Appreciable loss of power
5
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
When trouble arises
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
351
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag
inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to
the engine.
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY
mode or OFF.
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged
and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
352
5-1. Essential information
Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of
your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal
vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event data
recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or a near car crash event.
In a crash or a near car crash event
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near
car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following information:
● Engine speed
● Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
● Vehicle speed
● To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
● Position of the transmission shift lever
5
● Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
● Front passenger’s occupant classification
● SRS airbag deployment data
● SRS airbag system diagnostic data
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR
does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.
353
When trouble arises
● Driver's seat position
5-1. Essential information
Disclosure of the data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
● An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for a
leased vehicle) is obtained
● Officially requested by the police or other authorities
● Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit
● Ordered by a court law
However, if necessary Lexus will:
● Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance
● Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary
● Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information
to a non-Lexus organization for research purposes
354
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or
flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
(U.S.A.) • Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake booster system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
(Canada)
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
P. 370
5
When trouble arises
355
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
(U.S.A.)
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronic engine control system;
(Canada) • The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system.
356
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
(Canada)
• The brake assist system.
(U.S.A.)
Electric power steering warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
system.
Pre-collision system warning light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system.
■ Electric power steering warning light
When the battery is low or when the voltage drops temporarily, the electric power
steering warning light may come on.
CAUTION
■ When the electric power steering warning light comes on
357
5
When trouble arises
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, firmly hold and
operate it using more force than usual.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light turns off.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that a door or the
trunk is not fully closed.
Check that all doors and the
trunk are closed.
Low fuel level warning light
Remaining fuel
Refuel the vehicle.
(Approximately 2.9 gal. [11 L,
2.4 Imp.gal.] or less)
(On the instrument cluster)
(On the center
panel)
358
Automatic transmission fluid
temperature warning light
Indicates that the automatic
transmission fluid temperature is too high.
P. 127
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light (warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)*2
Fasten the seat belt.
Warns the front passenger to
fasten his/her seat belt.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure
Adjust the tire inflation pressure.
When the light comes on after
blinking for 1 minute:
Have the system checked by
Malfunction in the tire presyour Lexus dealer.
sure warning system
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on and
flashes to indicate that the
master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
P. 365
*1: Open door warning buzzer:
P. 370
2
* : Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
5
359
When trouble arises
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver and
front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 12 mph
(20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder and warning
buzzer
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection
sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound,
even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the
warning light may not operate properly.
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire
pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air
leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even
though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning
light will turn off after a few minutes.
360
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.
● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not regis-
tered in the tire pressure warning computer.
● If a different set of tires has been selected using the satellite switch.
● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher.
● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.
● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular, around the wheels or
wheel housings.
● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used. (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire
pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have
it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
5
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features P. 428)
When trouble arises
361
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-
ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat,
change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus
dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could
lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
362
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function properly.
363
5
When trouble arises
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
364
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:
Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the
multi-information display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning lights turns on again after performing the following actions, contact your Lexus dealer.
5
When trouble arises
365
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to
the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning message
(Flashing)
(Flashing)
366
Details
Indicates an abnormal engine oil pressure.
The warning light may turn on if the engine oil pressure is too low.
Indicates that the engine oil temperature is too high.
The engine oil temperature gauge display will also
flash. (P. 131)
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may
lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning message
Details
Indicates a malfunction in the tire pressure warning
system. (P. 300)
(Flashing and then The tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute.
continuously on)
Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock system.
5
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
367
When trouble arises
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Indicates an intuitive parking assist malfunction.
The malfunctioning assist-sensor is shown flashing on
the display.
(If equipped)
(Flashing and then continuously on)
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
368
Indicates a malfunction in the radar cruise control
system.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warning may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning message
Details
Indicates a malfunction in the TRAC, VSC or hillstart assist control systems.
5
When trouble arises
369
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected
problem, check that the warning message turns off.
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that one or
more of the doors is not
fully closed.
The system also indicates which doors are
not fully closed.
flashes and a
Make sure that all of the
doors are closed.
buzzer sounds to indicate that one or more of
the doors is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Indicates that the hood is
not fully closed.
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indiClose the hood.
cate that hood is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
370
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that the trunk is
not fully closed.
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indiClose the trunk.
cate that trunk is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the moon
roof is not fully closed
(with the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and the driver’s
door opened).
Close the moon roof.
Indicates that the parking
brake is still engaged.
5
flashes and a
Release the parking
brake.
When trouble arises
buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking
brake is still engaged
(with the vehicle having
reached a speed of 3
mph [5 km/h]).
Indicates that the washer
Add washer fluid.
fluid level is low.
371
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that engine oil
level is low.
Check the level of engine
oil, and add if necessary.
This message may
appear if the vehicle is
stopped on a slope.
Move the vehicle to a
level surface and check
to see if the message disappears.
Indicates that the engine
oil is scheduled to be
changed.
(U.S.A. only)
Comes on approximately
4500 miles (7200 km)
Check the engine oil, and
after the engine oil is
change if necessary.
changed. (The indicator
will not work properly
unless the oil maintenance data has been
reset.)
Indicates that the engine
oil should be changed.
(U.S.A. only)
372
Comes on approximately
5000 miles (8000 km) Check and change the
engine oil.
after the engine oil is
changed (and the oil
maintenance data has
been reset).
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
Check the tire inflation
Indicates low tire inflation
pressure, and adjust to the
pressure.
appropriate level.
(Flashing)
Indicates that the precollision system is not
currently functional.
Clean the grille and the
sensor.
This message appears
when the pre-collision
system is hot. In this case,
wait until the system
cools down.
Indicates that intuitive
parking assist is dirty or
covered with ice.
Clean the sensor.
Indicates that the radar
cruise control sensor is
dirty or covered with ice.
Clean the sensor.
(If equipped)
5
When trouble arises
(If equipped)
(Flashing and then continuously on)
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
373
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
(Flashing and then continuously on)
(Flashing)
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that the radar
cruise control system is
unable to judge vehicleto-vehicle distance.
• Switch the driving mode
to either the “Normal” or
“Sport” mode.
• If the windshield wipers
are on, turn them off or
set them to either the
intermittent or the slow
mode.
Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle
ahead (in radar cruise
mode).
Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.
(If equipped)
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
■ Changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
Make sure to reset the oil change system. (P. 288)
■ Warning light display in radar cruise mode (if equipped)
In the following cases, the warning light may not be displayed even if vehicle-tovehicle distance decreases.
● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the
vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle
● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
● Immediately after cruise control speed is set
● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed
374
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light turns off.
Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer
Once
Warning message

(Comes on for 10 seconds.)
(Flashing)
Correction
procedure
Indicates that an
attempt was
made to start the
engine without
the electronic
key being
present, or the
electronic key
was not functioning normally.
Start the engine
with the electronic key
present.*
Indicates that a
door other than
the driver’s door
has been opened
and closed with
the “ENGINE
Confirm the locaSTART STOP”
tion of the elecswitch in any
tronic key.
mode other than
OFF and the
electronic key
has been taken
out of the detection area.
375
5
When trouble arises
Once 3 times
Details
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer
Details
Correction
procedure
Once 3 times
Indicates that the
driver’s door has
been opened and
closed with the
shift lever in P, the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch in
any mode other
than OFF and the
electronic key
has been taken
out of the detection area.
Turn the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
OFF or confirm
the location of the
electronic key.
Con- Continuous tinuous
Indicates that the
driver’s door has
been opened and
closed with the
shift lever out of
• Shift the shift
in P, the
lever to P.
“ENGINE START
• Confirm the
STOP” switch in
location of the
any mode other
electronic key.
than OFF and the
electronic key
has been taken
out of the detection area.
Warning message
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashing)
376
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer
Once
Warning message

(Comes on for 10 seconds.)
Details
Correction
procedure
Indicates that the Replace the batkey battery is low. tery. (P. 320)
(Flashing)

Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
while applying the
brakes.

Indicates that the
steering lock has
not released
within 3 seconds
of pressing the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
again while turning the steering
wheel with the
brake pedal
depressed.
(Flashing)
377
5
When trouble arises


Indicates that the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch has
been turned
twice to ACCESSORY mode
without starting
the engine when
a closed door is
opened.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior Exterior
buzzer buzzer
Once

Once

Warning message
Details
Correction
procedure
Indicates that the
electronic key
P. 392
does not operate
properly.
*: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle, the
electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties receiving the
signal from the key. (P. 28)
378
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■ Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers.
■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Jack
Tighten
Loosen
5
When trouble arises
Tool bag
(including towing eyelet) Spare tire
Jack handle
379
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
STEP 1
Lift up the hook of the panel on the
trunk floor.
STEP 2
Secure the panel using the hook
provided.
STEP 3
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
380
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
STEP 1
Chock the tires.
Flat tire
Left-hand
side
Front
Righthand side
Left-hand
side
Rear
Righthand side
STEP 2
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is in
contact with the jack point.
381
5
When trouble arises
STEP 3
Wheel chock
positions
Behind the
rear righthand side tire
Behind the
rear lefthand side tire
In front of the
front righthand side tire
In front of the
front lefthand side tire
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 4
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
STEP 5
Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
Installing the spare tire
STEP 1
Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, and the tire may come off
the vehicle.
382
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 2
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
STEP 3
STEP 4
Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
5
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
When trouble arises
STEP 5
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
383
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ The compact spare tire
● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.
(P. 411)
■ When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you
replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the
light remains on.
■ After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 301)
384
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle
suddenly falling off the jack.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires
on this vehicle.
● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by the jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or
near the vehicle may be injured.
■ Replacing a flat tire
5
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5
kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheels
may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
385
When trouble arises
The oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ When using the compact spare tire
● Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for use with your
vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.
● Do not use more than one compact spare tire simultaneously.
● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.
■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is
installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe
this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
■ When the spare tire is installed
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may
not operate correctly:
● ABS & brake assist
● VSC
● TRAC
● VDIM
● Navigation system (if equipped)
● Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
● Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped)
● Cruise control (if equipped)
● PCS (if equipped)
● AFS
386
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair.
■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the
vehicle.
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to
when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.
■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
5
When trouble arises
387
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are
being followed (P. 116), consider each of the following points.
■ The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates
normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting
procedures. (P. 116)
■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 394)
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (P. 394)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 71)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
388
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be
a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Set the parking brake.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.
Press the shift lock override button.
389
When trouble arises
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other
key and the key number stamped on your key number plate.
(P. 20)
390
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted
(P. 28) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is
depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless
remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be
opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked functions
Doors
Remove the cover on the driver’s
door handle using the mechanical
key (P. 21) in order to perform
the following operations.
Locks all doors
Closes the windows/moon roof
(turn and hold)
Unlocks the door
Opens the windows/moon roof
(turn and hold)
Return the cover to the original
position after use.
391
5
When trouble arises
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver's door. Turning the key
once again unlocks the other
doors.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Trunk
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open.
Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the engine
STEP 1
STEP 2
Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes.
Touch the Lexus emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
An alarm will sound to indicate that
the start function cannot detect the
electronic key that is touched to
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch if any of the doors is opened
and closed while the key is touched
to the switch.
392
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 10
seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and
press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be
changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 116)
To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
within 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake
pedal depressed.
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Lexus
dealer.
STEP 3
■ Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes.
(P. 320)
5
When trouble arises
393
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s
battery is discharged.
You can call your Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps
below.
STEP 1
Connecting the jumper cables.
Remove the engine cover.
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the
illustration.
394
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
STEP 3 Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 4 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode,
then start the vehicle’s engine.
STEP 5 Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer
as soon as possible.
STEP 2
■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ To prevent battery discharge
5
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
When trouble arises
low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
395
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not
unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” termi-
nals.
● Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the
battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts
contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery.
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to
allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immedi-
ately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other
battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any
of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
396
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
397
5
When trouble arises
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the automatic air
conditioning system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
Remove the engine compartment cover (front). (P. 287)
Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.
If the fan is operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the
instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and call your local Lexus
dealer.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
engine coolant level and inspect
the radiator core (radiator) for
any leaks.
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 6
Add engine coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency measure if engine coolant
is unavailable. (P. 407)
Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is
experienced.
● Steam is coming from under the hood.
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the
steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious
injury such as burns.
● Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and belt while the engine is running.
● Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released
under pressure.
398
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly
can cause damage to the engine.
5
When trouble arises
399
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever
to P.
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide
traction under the tires.
Restart the engine.
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and carefully apply
the accelerator to free the vehicle.
Turn off TRAC and VSC if these functions are hampering your
attempts to free the vehicle. ( P. 171)
CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle
may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme
caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.
● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require
towing to be freed.
400
Vehicle specifications
6
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) .............. 402
Fuel information...................... 413
Tire information....................... 416
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ........ 428
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize .................... 433
401
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
Overall length
183.4 in. (4660 mm)
Overall width
71.4 in. (1815 mm)
Overall height *
55.7 in. (1415 mm)
Wheelbase
107.4 in. (2730 mm)
Tread
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
*: Unladen vehicle
402
Front
61.4 in. (1560 mm)
Rear
59.6 in. (1515 mm)
660 lb. (300 kg)
6-1. Specifications
Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used
in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in the engine
compartment.
This number is also on the Certification Label.
6
Vehicle specifications
403
6-1. Specifications
■ Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
404
6-1. Specifications
Engine
Model
2UR-GSE
Type
8-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
3.70 3.52 in. (94.0  89.5 mm)
Displacement
303.2 cu.in. (4969 cm3)
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating
91 (Research octane number 96) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
16.9 gal. (64 L, 14.0 lmp.gal)
6
Vehicle specifications
405
6-1. Specifications
Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(drain and refill)
without filter
8.7 qt. (8.2 L, 7.2 lmp.qt.)
with filter
9.8 qt. (9.3 L, 8.2 lmp.qt.)
Oil grade
ILSAC multi-grade engine oil
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent to satisfy the grade and viscosity shown
below.
Recommended oil
viscosity
Outside temperature
*:5W-30 is an oil that provides optimal levels of fuel efficiency.
Oil viscosity
● The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of
the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W
allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
● The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the
vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition.
406
6-1. Specifications
Cooling system
Capacity
12.6 qt. (11.9 L, 10.5 lmp.qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Ignition system
Spark plug
Make
Gap
DENSO FK20HBR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.
6
Vehicle specifications
407
6-1. Specifications
Electrical system
Battery
Open voltage* at
68F (20C):
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged
(*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after
the engine and all the lights are turned
off)
Charging rates
5 A max.
Differential
Oil capacity
1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 lmp.qt.)
Oil type and viscosity*
“Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil
LT 75W-85 GL-5” or equivalent
*: “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” is filled in your Lexus vehicle at factory
fill. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your
Lexus dealer for further details.
408
6-1. Specifications
Automatic transmission
Fluid capacity*
11.6 qt. (11.0 L, 9.7 lmp.qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
*: The fluid capacity is provided as a reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause
deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.
6
Vehicle specifications
409
6-1. Specifications
Brakes
Pedal clearance *1
4.3 in. (110 mm) Min.
Pedal free play
0.04  0.08 in. (1.0  2.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake pedal travel *2
7  9 clicks
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50
kgf) while the engine is running.
*2: Parking
brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N,
30.6 kgf).
410
6-1. Specifications
Steering
Free play
Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Tires and wheels
Tire size
Front: 225/40R19 93Y
Rear: 255/35R19 96Y
Spare: T135/70R18 103M
Front:
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Rear:
36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Front and rear tire inflation pres- Spare:
sure
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire inflation *: When driving at high speeds above 100 mph
pressure)
(160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are
permitted by law, add 9.0 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/
cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires.
Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
Front wheels: 19  8J
Rear wheels: 19 9J
Spare wheel: 18  4T
6
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Vehicle specifications
411
6-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type
9005
D4S
60
35
D
A
Front turn signal lights

21
C
Parking lights
168
5
E
Front fog lights

55
B
Rear turn signal lights

21
C
Back-up lights
921
16
E
Outer foot lights

5
E
Vanity lights

8
E
Interior lights
Front
Rear

5
3
E
F
Overhead courtesy lights
Front
Rear

3.8
3
E
F
Front door courtesy lights

5
E
Trunk light

5
F
Headlights
High beam
Low/high beam
Exterior
Interior
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
412
D4S discharge bulbs
H11 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (amber)
HB3 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
Double end bulbs
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane
Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance. If 91
octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91). Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking and
significantly reduced performance. Persistent knocking can lead to engine
damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded
gasoline.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only
accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating
or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you
are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this
does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
6
Vehicle specifications
413
6-1. Specifications
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is
expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission
levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
customer satisfaction through better performance.
■ Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to
avoid build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep
clean intake systems.
■ Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many
areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■ Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline
● Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate con-
tent is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.
● If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower
than 87.
● Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■ Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
414
6-1. Specifications
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that stated
here will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
6
Vehicle specifications
415
6-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Standard tire
Compact spare tire
Tire size
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Location of treadwear indicators
Tire ply composition and materials
(P. 418)
(P. 418)
(P. 300)
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
416
6-1. Specifications
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is
a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure
(P. 306)
(P. 411)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.
Summer tire or all season tire
(P. 306)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
(P. 384)
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary
emergency use only.
6
Vehicle specifications
417
6-1. Specifications
Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identification mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that
the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
Tire size
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
418
6-1. Specifications
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
6
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read
this information.
419
Vehicle specifications
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S.
Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
6-1. Specifications
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and
they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
420
6-1. Specifications
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Meaning
Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation
pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer.
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of transmission, power
steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats,
radio and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not)
421
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by
style or code
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68
kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
422
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
Vehicle maximum load on
distributing to each axle its share of the maximum
the tire
loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and
dividing it by two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
6
Vehicle specifications
423
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between components in
the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord
The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit
on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses
the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Groove
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass
424
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Intended outboard sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must always
face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire
may be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to
labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or
less.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
6
Vehicle specifications
425
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted
on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces,
and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol (
on at least one sidewall
Test rim
426
)
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially around a
tire
Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing
*:Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
11 through 15
16 through 20
427
6
Vehicle specifications
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus
dealership.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Item
Smart access
system with
push-button
start
(P. 24)
Default setting
Customized
setting
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
On
Off
Operation signal
(Buzzer)
On
Off
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
On
Off
Function
Unlocking operation
Wireless
remote control
(P. 35)
Automatic door lock
function to be activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened after being
unlocked
428
30 seconds
60 seconds
120 seconds
6-2. Customization
Item
Wireless
remote control
(P. 35)
Default setting
Customized
setting
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
On
Off
Operation signal
(Buzzer)
On
Off
Door lock buzzer
On
Off
Trunk unlocking function
On
Off
Function
Trunk unlocking operation Push and hold
Panic function
Off
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Speed-detecting automatic door lock function
Off
On
Opening driver's door
unlocks all doors
Off
On
Shifting gears to P
unlocks all doors
On
Off
Shifting gears to position
other than P locks all
doors
On
Off
Auto tilt-away function
On
Off
6
Vehicle specifications
Steering
wheel
(P. 58)
One short push
On
Unlocking using a key
Door lock
(P. 37)
Push twice
429
6-2. Customization
Item
Power windows
(P. 63)
Moon roof
(P. 65)
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 142)
Lights
(P. 143)
430
Function
Default setting
Customized
setting
Linked door lock operation
On
Off
Linked door key operation
Open and close
Wireless remote control
linked operation
On
Off
Linked door lock operation
On
Off
Linked door key operation
Open and close
Open only
Close only
Open only
Close only
Linked operation of components when door key is
used
Slide only
Tilt only
Wireless remote control
linked operation
On
Off
Linked operation of components when wireless
remote control is used
Slide only
Tilt only
Level 3
Level 1 to 5
Light sensor sensitivity
Time elapsed before
headlights automatically
turn off after doors are
closed
Daytime running light system (U.S.A. only)
0 seconds
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
On
Off
6-2. Customization
Item
Windshield
wipers and
washer
(P. 146)
Intuitive parking assist
(P. 163)
Illumination
(P. 227)
Default setting
Customized
setting
Switching operation when
the vehicle is stationary
On
Off
Drip prevention function
On
Off
Time elapsed before the
drip prevention function
operates
Variable
depending on
the vehicle
speed
3 seconds
Back sensor operation
display and buzzer
On
Off
Level 3
Level 1 to 5
Distance which a sensor
detects
4.9 ft. (150 cm)
2.0 ft. (60 cm)
Time elapsed before lights
turn off
15 seconds
Buzzer volume
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation when the
doors are unlocked
On
Off
Operation after the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch turned OFF
On
Off
Front foot well lights
On
Off
Shift lever light
On
Off
Outer foot light
On
Off
Vehicle speed linked seat
belt reminder buzzer
On
Off
6
Vehicle specifications
Seat belt
reminder
(P. 358)
Function
431
6-2. Customization
Multi-information display (P. 138)
Country
Canada
432
Available language
English and French
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
The following item must be initialized for normal system operation in cases
such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on
the vehicle.
Item
When to initialize
Reference
Power window
After reconnecting or changing the
battery
Engine oil maintenance
data
After changing engine oil
P. 288
Tire pressure warning
system
When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed
P. 300
P. 63
6
Vehicle specifications
433
6-3. Initialization
434
For owners
7
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners..................... 436
Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners
(in French) .............................. 437
435
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
436
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted
from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
● Déroulez la sangle diagonale de
telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur
l'épaule, sans pour autant être
en contact avec votre cou ou
glisser de votre épaule.
● Placez la sangle abdominale le
plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier de
siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le
plus droit possible et calez-vous
bien dans le siège.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
Guide confort de ceinture de sécurité (sièges arrière)
437
7
For owners
Si la sangle diagonale est proche
du cou de la personne, faites
coulisser le guide de confort de
ceinture de sécurité vers l'avant.
Entretien et soin
■ Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas
effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
ATTENTION
■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas
entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas
une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture
de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en
cas d'accident.
438
Index
Abbreviation list .....................440
Alphabetical index.................. 442
What to do if... ........................ 453
For details of equipment related to the navigation system,
such as the audio system, refer to the “Navigation System
Owner's Manual”.
439
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS
MEANING
ABS
Anti-lock Brake System
AFS
Adaptive Front-lighting System
AI-SHIFT
Artificial Intelligence Shift
ALR
Automatic Locking Retractor
CAL
Calibration
CRS
Child Restraint System
DISP
Display
ECU
Electronic Control Unit
EDR
Event data recorder
ELR
Emergency Locking Retractor
EPS
Electric Power Steering
GAWR
Gross Axle Weight Rating
I/M
Emission inspection and maintenance
LATCH
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LSD
Limited Slip Differential
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
M+S
Mud and Snow
MTBE
Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD
On Board Diagnostics
PCS
Pre-Collision System
SRS
Supplemental Restraint System
TIN
Tire Identification Number
TPMS
Tire Pressure Warning System
TRAC
Traction Control
440
Abbreviation list
ABBREVIATIONS
MEANING
VDIM
Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management
VIN
Vehicle Identification Number
VSC
Vehicle Stability Control
441
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A A/C .............................................................190
ABS.............................................................. 169
ACCESSORY mode ............................116
AFS .............................................................. 143
Adaptive front lighting system ......... 143
Air conditioning filter ........................... 317
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter .........................317
Automatic air conditioning
system................................................... 190
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions...........80
Airbag precautions for your
child..........................................................84
Airbag warning light ........................356
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions................................................81
Curtain shield airbag
precautions ..........................................84
Front passenger occupant
classification system.........................89
General airbag precautions ...........84
Locations of airbags............................ 78
Modification and disposal of
airbags....................................................88
Proper driving posture ............. 76, 84
Side airbag operating
conditions................................................81
Side airbag precautions ....................84
SRS airbags ............................................. 78
442
Alarm............................................................ 73
Antenna....................................................206
Anti-lock brake system........................169
Armrest ....................................................248
Ashtrays.................................................... 243
Audio input.............................................. 224
Audio system
Antenna.................................................. 206
Audio input............................................224
Audio visual input...............................224
AUX adapter .......................................224
CD player/changer......................... 209
MP3/WMA disc................................. 215
Optimal use ............................................221
Portable music player......................224
Radio ....................................................... 202
Steering wheel audio switch.........225
Audio visual input................................. 224
Automatic air conditioning
system ..................................................... 190
Automatic headlight leveling
system ......................................................144
Automatic light control system.........142
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission ...................120
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P...................................389
M mode ................................................... 124
AUX adapter ......................................... 224
Alphabetical index
B Back-up lights
Wattage ................................................... 412
Battery
Checking............................................... 296
If the vehicle has discharged
battery.................................................. 394
Preparing and checking
before winter......................................184
Bottle holders .........................................236
Brake
Fluid.......................................................... 294
Parking brake........................................129
Brake assist...............................................169
C Care
Exterior ...................................................268
Interior....................................................... 271
Seat belts ................................................272
Cargo capacity ...................................... 180
Cargo hooks .......................................... 253
CD changer ........................................... 209
CD player................................................ 209
Chains.........................................................184
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition ....................94
Booster seats, installation ...............100
Convertible seats, definition............94
Convertible seats, installation.......100
Front passenger occupant
classification system.........................89
Infant seats, definition..........................94
Infant seats, installation .....................100
Installing CRS with lower
anchorages...........................................99
Installing CRS with seat belts........100
Installing CRS with top straps....... 104
Child safety
Airbag precautions..............................84
Battery precautions ..............297, 396
Child restraint system.........................94
Child-protectors ...................................38
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................................55
Installing child restraints.....................98
Moon roof precautions...................... 67
Power window lock switch..............63
Power window precautions ............64
Removed electronic key battery
precautions..........................................321
Seat belt comfort guide .....................53
Seat belt extender precautions......57
Seat belt precautions ..........................56
Seat heater precautions.................. 247
Trunk precautions.................................43
443
Alphabetical index
Child-protectors ......................................38
Cigarette lighter....................................244
Cleaning
Exterior ...................................................268
Interior....................................................... 271
Seat belts.................................................272
Clock .........................................................239
Coat hooks............................................... 251
Compass ..................................................262
Condenser ..............................................294
Console box ...........................................232
Cooling system
Engine overheating .......................... 397
Cornering assist sensors .................... 163
Cruise control
Cruise control ...................................... 150
Dynamic radar cruise control .......153
Cup holders ............................................234
Curtain shield airbags............................78
Customizable features .......................428
444
D Daytime running light system............143
Defogger
Rear window .........................................198
Side mirrors............................................198
Dimension ...............................................402
Dinghy towing..........................................187
Display
Dynamic radar cruise control.......153
Satellite switch mode....................... 240
Trip information....................................139
Warning message ............................ 365
Do-it-yourself maintenance.............280
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights .........................227
Wattage ................................................... 412
Door pockets ......................................... 236
Doors
Door glasses............................................63
Door lock ................................ 24, 35, 37
Side mirrors............................................... 61
Driver's seat belt reminder light.....358
Driving
Correct posture.....................................76
Procedures.............................................108
Driving position memory...................... 45
Alphabetical index
E Electric power steering .......................169
Electronic key
If the electronic key does not
operate properly..............................391
Emergency flashers
Switch...................................................... 344
Emergency, in case of
If the engine will not start...............388
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P...................................389
If the vehicle has discharged
battery.................................................. 394
If the warning buzzer sounds......355
If the warning light turns on..........355
If the warning message is
displayed............................................365
If you have a flat tire ........................ 379
If you lose your keys ........................390
If you think something is
wrong.....................................................351
If the electronic key does not
operate properly..............................391
If your vehicle becomes stuck ....400
If your vehicle needs to be
towed................................................... 345
If your vehicle overheats................ 397
Engine
ACCESSORY mode.........................116
Compartment..................................... 286
Engine switch..........................................116
Hood........................................................283
How to start the engine .....................116
Identification number ...................... 403
If the engine will not start...............388
Ignition switch.........................................116
Overheating .........................................397
Engine compartment cover .............287
Engine coolant
Capacity .................................................407
Checking ...............................................292
Preparing and checking
before winter ..................................... 184
Engine coolant temperature
gauge.........................................................131
Engine immobilizer system....................71
Engine oil
Capacity ................................................ 406
Checking .............................................. 288
Preparing and checking
before winter ..................................... 184
Engine oil maintenance data............290
EPS .............................................................. 169
Event data recorder ............................353
445
Alphabetical index
F
446
First-aid kit storage belt .....................253
Floor mat ..................................................252
Fluid
Brake........................................................ 294
Washer...................................................299
Fog lights
Switch ........................................................145
Wattage....................................................412
Foot well lights ....................................... 227
Front fog lights
Switch ........................................................145
Wattage....................................................412
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............................89
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light..................................... 358
Front seats
Adjustment............................................... 44
Driving position memory.................. 45
Seat position memory ........................ 49
Front turn signal lights
Switch ........................................................128
Wattage....................................................412
Fuel
Capacity.................................................405
Fuel gauge ................................................131
Fuel pump shut off system ............352
Gas station information..................456
Information..............................................413
Refueling ...................................................68
Fuel door .....................................................68
Fuel filler door ...........................................68
Fuel pump shut off system.................352
Fuses ..........................................................322
G Garage door opener.......................... 256
Gas station information ..................... 456
Gauges........................................................ 131
Glove box..................................................231
Glove box light...................................... 232
H Hazard lights
Switch.......................................................344
Head restraints
Adjusting ................................................... 51
Headlight aim.........................................336
Headlight cleaner...................................149
Headlights
Discharge headlights
precautions........................................342
Replacing light bulbs.......................338
Switch........................................................ 142
Wattage ................................................... 412
Heaters
Seat heaters ..........................................246
Side mirrors............................................198
Hill-start assist control..........................169
Hood..........................................................283
Hooks
Cargo...................................................... 253
Coat........................................................... 251
Shopping bag ..................................... 253
Horn............................................................ 130
Alphabetical index
I
I/M test ......................................................279
Identification
Engine .....................................................403
Vehicle....................................................403
Ignition switch........................................... 116
Illuminated entry system ....................227
Indicator lights.........................................135
Initialization
Items to initialize................................. 433
Inside rear view mirror.......................... 60
Interior lights
Interior lights .........................................227
Switch.......................................................229
Wattage ................................................... 412
J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack ................... 284
Vehicle-equipped jack................... 379
Jack handle ..............................................379
K Keyless entry............................................. 35
Keys
Electronic key......................................... 20
Engine switch ..........................................116
If you lose your keys ........................390
If the electronic key does not
operate properly..............................391
Key number............................................. 20
Keyless entry........................................... 35
Keys............................................................. 20
Mechanical key ........................................21
Wireless remote control key.......... 35
L
Light bulbs
Replacing...............................................338
Wattage ................................................... 412
Lights
Door courtesy lights......................... 227
Emergency flasher switch .............344
Fog light switch .................................... 145
Hazard light switch ...........................344
Headlights switch.................................142
Interior light switch ............................229
Outer foot lights ................................. 227
Overhead courtesy light................ 227
Personal light switch.........................229
Replacing light bulbs....................... 338
Shift lever light...................................... 227
Turn signal lever .................................. 128
Vanity lights ..........................................238
Wattage....................................................412
Load capacity..........................................183
M Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance......... 280
General maintenance .....................276
Maintenance data..............................402
Maintenance requirements .......... 274
Meter
Instrument panel light control....... 133
Meters......................................................... 131
Micro dust and pollen filter................ 194
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror.......................60
Side mirror heater ..............................198
Side mirrors ...............................................61
Vanity mirrors......................................238
Moon roof...................................................65
MP3 disc ................................................... 215
Multi-information display ...................138
447
Alphabetical index
O Odometer...................................................131
Oil
Engine oil ...............................................288
Opener
Fuel filler door.........................................68
Hood........................................................283
Trunk............................................................. 41
Outer foot lights
Outer foot lights..................................227
Wattage....................................................412
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding ...........................61
Mirror position memory ................... 45
Outside temperature display............ 139
Overhead console ...............................233
Overhead courtesy lights
Overhead courtesy lights ..............227
Wattage....................................................412
Overheating, Engine...........................397
P
448
Parking assist sensors .......................... 163
Parking brake.......................................... 129
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs........................338
Switch ........................................................142
Wattage....................................................412
PCS ..............................................................176
Personal lights
Switch ...................................................... 229
Power outlet............................................245
Power windows ........................................63
Pre-collision system...............................176
R
Radar cruise control............................. 153
Radiator.................................................... 294
Radio.......................................................... 202
RDS ............................................................203
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.......................338
Wattage ................................................... 412
Rear view mirror
Compass................................................262
Rear window defogger ....................... 198
Replacing
Electronic key battery..................... 320
Fuses.........................................................322
Light bulbs ............................................338
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners.......................................... 436
S
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt ........................53
Automatic locking retractor ............54
Child restraint system
installation............................................. 98
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts .....................................272
Emergency locking retractor..........54
How to wear your seat belt .............52
How your child should wear
the seat belt.......................................... 55
Pregnant women,
proper seat belt use .........................54
Reminder light.....................................358
Seat belt extenders.............................. 55
Seat belt pretensioners ......................53
Alphabetical index
Seat heaters.............................................246
Seat position memory ............................49
Seating capacity .....................................183
Seats
Adjustment ...............................................44
Adjustment precautions.....................44
Child seats/child restraint
system installation............................. 98
Cleaning .................................................. 271
Driver’s seat position memory ...... 45
Front passenger seat position
memory ..................................................49
Head restraint .......................................... 51
Properly sitting in the seat.................76
Seat heaters.......................................... 246
Service reminder indicators .............135
Shift lever
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P...................................389
Transmission..........................................120
Shift lever light........................................227
Shift lock system ................................... 389
Shopping bag hooks........................... 253
Side airbags................................................78
Side marker lights
Switch........................................................ 142
Side mirrors
Adjusting and folding ........................... 61
Mirror position memory ................... 45
Smart access system with
push-button start
Entry function ..........................................24
Starting the engine................................116
Spare tire
Inflation pressure................................... 311
Storage location .................................379
Spark plug................................................407
Specifications .........................................402
Speech command switch*
Speedometer ............................................131
Steering wheel
Adjustment.............................................. 58
Audio switches....................................225
Steering wheel position
memory..................................................45
Storage feature....................................... 231
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes stuck....400
Sun visors ................................................. 237
Sunshade.....................................................66
Switch
Emergency flasher switch .............344
Engine switch..........................................116
Fog light switch .................................... 145
F-sport mode total control
switch............................................122, 172
Hazard light switch ...........................344
Ignition switch.........................................116
Light switches ........................................142
Power door lock switch .................... 37
Power window switch ........................63
Satellite switches.................................240
Transmission shift
switches.......................................122, 124
Window lock switch............................63
Wiper and washer switch............... 146
449
Alphabetical index
T
450
Tachometer ....................................................131
Tail lights
Switch ........................................................142
Talk switch*
Telephone switch*
Theft deterrent system
Alarm ...........................................................73
Engine immobilizer system ............... 71
Theft prevention labels .......................... 75
Tire inflation pressure ............................311
Tire information
Glossary...................................................421
Size ............................................................ 418
Tire identification number .............. 418
Uniform tire quality grading...........419
Tires
Chains ...................................................... 184
Checking .............................................. 300
If you have a flat tire.......................... 379
Inflation pressure....................................311
Inflation pressure sensor............... 300
Information..............................................416
Replacing............................................... 379
Rotating tires ........................................305
Size ...............................................................411
Snow tires............................................... 184
Tools...........................................................379
Total load capacity ................................183
Towing
Dinghy towing.......................................187
Emergency towing ...........................345
Trailer towing........................................ 186
TRAC ..........................................................169
Traction control.......................................169
Transmission shift switches.......122, 124
Trip meter ................................................... 131
Trunk
Extending a space .............................249
Opener ........................................................41
Trunk light
Trunk light .................................................42
Wattage ................................................... 412
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.......................338
Switch........................................................128
Wattage ................................................... 412
V
Vanity lights
Vanity lights.......................................... 238
Wattage ................................................... 412
Vanity mirrors ........................................238
VDIM...........................................................169
Vehicle dynamics integrated
management .........................................169
Vehicle identification number.........403
Vehicle stability control .......................169
VSC .............................................................169
Alphabetical index
W Warning buzzers
Brake system.......................................355
Open door ..........................................358
Seat belt reminder ............................358
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system ..................356
Automatic transmission fluid
temperature warning light.........358
Brake assist system ..........................356
Brake system.......................................355
Charging system...............................356
Electric power steering
warning light.....................................356
Low fuel level.......................................358
Malfunction indicator lamp ..........356
Master warning light........................358
Open door ...........................................358
Pre-collision system.........................356
Pretensioners ......................................356
Seat belt reminder light ..................358
SRS airbags..........................................356
Tire pressure warning
light........................................................358
Warning messages
Dynamic radar
cruise control........................367, 370
Engine oil level ....................................370
Engine oil maintenance ..................370
Engine oil pressure .......................... 366
Engine oil temperature .................. 366
Hill-start assist control .................... 369
Hood........................................................370
Intuitive parking assist..........367, 370
Moon roof .............................................370
Open door............................................370
Parking brake ......................................370
Pre-collision system..............367, 370
Smart access system with
push-button start ............................375
Steering lock.........................................367
Tire pressure
warning system....................367, 370
Traction control ................................. 369
Trunk ........................................................370
Vehicle stability control ................. 369
Washer fluid .........................................370
Washer
Checking ...............................................299
Preparing and checking
before winter ..................................... 184
Switch........................................................ 146
Washing and waxing...........................268
*: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”
451
Alphabetical index
Weight
Cargo capacity.................................... 180
Load limits .............................................. 183
Weight ....................................................402
Wheels ....................................................... 315
Window glasses ......................................63
Window lock switch ...............................63
Windows
Power windows..................................... 63
Rear window defogger ................... 198
Washer.....................................................146
Windshield wipers................................. 146
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery ......................320
WMA disc ................................................ 215
452
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 379 If you have a flat tire
P. 388 If the engine will not start
The engine does not start
P. 71
Engine immobilizer system
P. 394 If the vehicle battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 389
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
P. 397 If your vehicle overheats
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
The key is lost
P. 390 If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 394 If the vehicle battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 37
Doors
The horn begins to sound
P. 73
Alarm
The vehicle is stuck in mud or
sand
P. 400 If the vehicle becomes stuck
453
What to do if...
A warning light or indicator
light comes on
P. 355
If a warning light turns on or a warning
buzzer sounds...
■Warning lights
Brake system warning light
or
or
P. 355
P. 356
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light
P. 358
“ABS” warning light
or
P. 356
Low fuel level warning light
P. 358
SRS warning light
P. 356
Open door warning light
P. 358
Charging system warning
light
P. 356
Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light
P. 358
454
Malfunction indicator lamp
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
P. 358
Master warning light
P. 358
Electric power steering warning
light
P. 356
Pre-collision system warning light
P. 356
Tire pressure warning light
P. 358
What to do if...
A warning message is displayed
P. 365 If a warning message is displayed
455
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 283
Trunk opener
P. 41
Hood lock release lever
P. 283
Fuel tank capacity
Fuel type
Cold tire inflation
pressure
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill)
Engine oil type
456
Fuel filler door opener
P. 68
Fuel filler door
P. 68
Tire inflation pressure
P. 411
16.9 gal. (64 L, 14.0 lmp.gal.)
Unleaded gasoline only
P. 69, 405
P. 411
qt. (L, Imp.qt.)
Without filter 8.7 (8.2, 7.2)
With filter
9.8 (9.3, 8.2)
Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W-30
P. 406
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement